Belt Conveyor Design-Dunlop

CONVEYOR BELT TECHNIQUE
DE S I GN AND C AL C UL AT I ON
I
Index
1 Introduction
1.1 Foreword
1.2 Development chronology, development aims
1.3 Dunlop-Enerka test rig
2 Belt Conveyors
2.1 Basic sketch, concept, description
3. Drive Systems
3.1 Pulley arrangement, conveying systems
3.2 Single pulley head drive, Dual pulley head drive, Head and tail drive,
general criteria
3.3 Drive components
Pulley motor, Geared motor, Motor-gears-Couplings
4 Couplings
4.1 Coupling types, fixed coupling, flexible coupling, fluid coupling,
hydro dynamic coupling
4.2 Start-up procedure
4.3 Run back prevention (holdback)
5. Drive Pulley
5.1 Force transmission, Eytelwein limitations, slip, creep
5.2 Friction factor , angle of wrap
6. Take-up (tension) Systems
6.1 General, fixed take-up, gravity weight take-up, regulated take-up
tension
7 Detection Devices
7.1 Belt tension detection, off-track detection, belt slip detection,
longitudinal slitting safety device
8 Cleaning Devices
8.1 General, ground rules
8.2 Cable scraper, transverse scraper, fan scraper staggered scraper,
rotary scraper (vertical)
8.3 Rotary scraper (horizontal) rapping roller, belt turnover, high pres-
sure water cleaning
9 Load
9.1 General, bulk loads, piece loads, bulk density, angle of repose/sur-
charge, lump size, classification
9.2 Temperature, moisture, chemical characteristics, p
H
value, angle of
inclination
10 Conveyor Belt
10.1 General, belt construction
10.2 Carcase, ply material
10.3 Covers, cover qualities (DIN/ISO)
10.4 Special qualities, cover thickness ratio
10.5 Angle of inclination values, cover thickness values
10.6 DUNLOP cover qualities, specifications
10.7 Basic Materials
10.8 Belt specification, DUNLOP belt types
II
Index
11 Design
11.1 Main data, belt speed, standard values, recommended values
11.2 Belt widths, standard widths, minimum belt width, idler arrange-
ment, idler spacing
11.3 Idler spacing (recommended values) idler rotation, idler roll diame-
ter, standard idler roll lengths L
11.4 Photograph
11.5 Cross sectional area of load, comparison various cross sections
11.6 Conveyor capacity, load stream volume, load stream mass, degree
of filling, reduction factor
11.7 Power requirement, electric motor type list
11.8 Adjustment factors
11.9 Belt types
11.10 Pulley diameters, standard diameters
11.11 Pulley rotation, pulley loading
11.12 Average surface pressure, transmission capability, start-up torque
11.13 Troughing transition, pulley lift
11.14 Convex vertical curve values
11.15 Concave vertical curve, curve co-ordinates
11.16 Belt turnover, turnover length, values
11.17 Horizontal curve, values
12 Basis of Calculation
12.1 Resistance to motion, main resistance, secondary resistance, slope
resistance, special resistances
12.2 Peripheral force F
U
(working), summation
12.3 Factor C (allowance for secondary resistance)
12.4 Fictitious friction factor f
12.5 Mass of rotating idler parts. Mass of belt
12.6 Mass of material load. Peripheral force F
A
(start-up) friction cut-off
material/belt
12.7 Start-up factor K
A
, acceleration a
A
, take-off time, acceleration
distance
B
(braking), delay, over-run distance, braking tor-
que of motor M
M
, drive power at pulley P
T
, motor power P
M
12.9 Degree of efficiency , nominal motor power (DIN) drive system
12.10 Distribution of drive power with head and tail drive, distribution of
drive power with dual pulley head drive
12.11 Factor x for various drive conditions
12.12 Distribution of drive power with dual pulley head and tail drive
12.13 Belt tensions T
1
and T
2
. Belt tension correction, fixed take-up
12.14 Correction of belt tensions moveable take-up
12.15 Correction of belt tensions for minimum belt tensions
12.16 Sequential calculation to ascertain belt tensions T
1
to T
4
, force
distribution, individual resistances
12.17 Sequential calculation for single pulley head drive
12.18 Sequential calculation for tail drive and tail drive braking
12.19 Sequential calculation for head and tail drive and dual pulley head
drive
12.20 Section loadings
12.21 Nominal belt strength, safety factor
12.22 Selection of belt type (criteria)
12.23 Selection of belt type (criteria continuation)
12.24 Selection of belt type (criteria continuation)
12.25 Belt reference to ascertain a belt type
12.26 Determination of fall energy at the loading point
12.27 Influence of stresses on belt selection
12.28 Photograph
12.29 Determination of troughing capabilities
12.30 Determination of cover thicknesses
12.31 Determination of take-up travel, values
III
Index
13 Calculation Example
13.1 Duty data, short calculation
U
and motor performance P
M
13.3 Individual resistances, sequential calculation
13.4 Sequential calculation for various take-up systems
13.5 Belt safety, pre-tension, take-up travel
13.6 Pulley diameter, troughing transition
13.7 Convex and concave vertical curve
13.8 Control of additional stresses
13.9 Computer calculations
13.10 Photograph
14 Slider Bed Belt Conveyors
14.1 Supporting surface, belt widths, belt speeds
14.2 Conveying capacity, resistance to motion
14.3 Frictional resistance, friction coefficient
G
(belt/supporting surface)
14.4 Slope resistance, special resistances
14.5 Special Resistances (continued)
14.6 Drive power, belt tension, peripheral force F
A
14.7 Safety Factor S, nominal belt strength K
N
15 Bucket Elevator Belts
15.1 Conveying capacity, bucket contents, bucket shape
15.2 Degree of Filling, speed
15.3 Loading, discharging
15.4 Bucket spacing, belt width, main resistance
15.5 Loading resistance, secondary resistance, peripheral force F
U
,
motor power
15.6 Start-up factor, determination of belt type
15.7 Determination of belt tensions T
1
and T
2
15.8 Safety factor S, friction coefficient (belt/drive pulley)
15.9 Belt stress T
1
(load dependent) pulley diameter, number of plies
15.10 Individual resistances, peripheral force F
U
15.11 Values for degree of filling, bulk density, speed
15.12 Bucket shapes and dimensions
15.13 Bucket attachment, making endless joint
IV
Index
A Theoretical Volume Stream
A.1 Flat carrying idlers, 2 roll troughing idlers
A.2 3 roll troughing idlers
A.3 Deep troughing, garland idlers
A.4 Box section belt
A.5 Steep conveying belts
A.6 Corrugated edge belts without cleats
B Masses of Rotating Idler Rollers
B.1 Standard idlers
B.2 Cushion idlers, disc idlers
C Conveyor Belt Thicknesses and weights
C.1 Belt types SUPERFORT, STARFLEX, DUNLOFLEX, TRIOFLEX,
FERROFLEX
C.2 Steep incline belts CHEVRON, HIGH-CHEVRON, MULTIPROF
C.3 Slider bed belts, DUNLOPLAST belts
C.4 Steel cord belts SILVERCORD
rubber cleats
D Secondary Resistances
D.1 Inertial and frictional resistance at the loading point
Frictional resistance from skirt plates (loading point)
Frictional resistance from belt cleaners
D.2 Belt bending (flexing) resistance, pulley bearing resistance
E Special Resistances
E.1 Resistance due to idler tilt
Frictional resistance from skirt plates beyond the loading point
Resistance due to sideways load discharge
Resistance from trippers
E.2 Resistance to belt sealing strip beyond the loading point
Resistance from motion of bunker drag-out belts
F Drive Factors c
1
and c
2
F.1 Drive factors c
1
and c
2
value e
a
G Safety Factor S
G.1 Belt safety (definition) time/strength behaviour, reductions
G.2 Safety factors S for steady and non-steady state working and for
temporary localised peak stresses
H Stress-Strain Curve
H.1 Elongation characteristics (hysteresis curve)
H.2 Stress-strain curve (diagram)
I Additional Stresses
I.1 Belt safety, elastic modulus
I.2 Values for S
min
, elongation value k
D
I.3 Troughing transition: safety and elongation
I.4 Troughing transition with raised pulley
I.5 Concave vertical curves
I.6 Convex vertical curves
I.7 Horizontal curve
I.8 Belt turnover
J Roll Diameter
J.1 Standard rolls, coiled roll, double coiled roll, `S form coiled roll, roll
on oval core
J.2 Diameter of standard rolls (table)
V
Index
K Pulley Diameters
K.1 Pulley diameters for DUNLOP-ENERKA belt types
K.2 Pulley diameters for DUNLOPLAST PVG and PVC belts
K.3 Pulley diameters for steel cord belts SILVERCORD
L Crowned Pulleys
L.1 Dimensions, taper
M Arrangement of Rubber Supporting Idler Discs
M.1 Installation instructions, measurements
N Chemical Resistance
N.1 Resistance of the carcase
N.2 Resistance of the covers
N.3 Resistance of the covers (continued)
O Steep Incline Installations
O.1 Hints for the improvement of installation components
O.2 Hints for the improvement of installation components (continued)
P Endless Splicing
P.1 Methods, hot vulcanising
P.2 Warm vulcanization, cold vulcanisation, mechanical fasteners
Q Material Characteristics
Q.1 Material characteristics
Q.2 Material characteristics (continued)
Dunlop-Enerka Belting Dunlop-Enerka France Sarl
P.O. Box 86 Z.I. des Ebisoires
Centurion Way 78370 Plaisir
Farington, Leyland France
Preston, Lancashire PR5 2EY Tel. +33 (0)1 3055 5419
United Kingdom Fax +33 (0)1 3054 0238
Tel. +44 (0) 1772 433 751 Telex 695608
Fax +44 (0) 1772 623 967
Telex 627080
Dunlop-CCT s.a. Dunlop-Enerka b.v.
Boulevard des Combattants 64 Visokovoltnij Proezd, 1
7500 Tournai 127577, Moskow
Belgium Russia
Tel. +32 (0) 69 254 811 Tel. +7 095 901 8857
Fax +32 (0) 69 226 270 Fax +7 095 901 2921
Telex 57187
Dunlop-Enerka b.v. Dunlop-CCT s.a.
Postbus 14 Ovnatanyana str. 4
9200 AA Drachten 340017, Donjetsk
The Netherlands The Ukraine
Tel. +31 (0) 512 585 555 Tel. +38 0622 955 038
Fax +31 (0) 512 585 490 Fax +38 0622 323 977
Telex 46116
Dunlop-Enerka GmbH Dunlop-Enerka S.L.
Friedrich-Bergius-Strasse 10 Pol. Ind. Les Comes
41516 Grevenbroich C/Italia, Parc, 70 Nave 3
Germany 08700 Igualada
Tel. +49 (0) 2181 2701 00 Barcelona
Fax +49 (0) 2181 2701 30 Spain
Tel. +34 (9)3 80 55 446
Fax +34 (9)3 80 54 269
All information contained in this manual has been assembled with great care. It represents up-to-date knowledge and techniques and is based on our long experience of the
industry. We would however advise you that modifications may be necessary to cater for new technical developments. All information, guide values, comments etc. are given
for guidance purposes only and the ultimate responsibility for the use of this information in conveyor design and any subsequent liability rests with the end user, particularly
where the suitability of our products for certain applications is concerned. The data and values given are based on average values.
Introduction
1.1
C onveyor belts have been used for decades to transport bulk and unit loads.
They have proved their w orth everyw here because belt conveyor installations
can be adapted to m eet nearly all local conditions. They are w ork-safe and
econom ical.
The dem and for ever increasing capacities and ever longer conveying lengths
has accelerated the developm ent of the belt conveyor technique, new m ate-
rials are being developed, new conveying system s are being planned and
tested especially those having regard to the environm ental.
The conveyor belt plays the m ajor part in the w hole system and has to over-
com e the m any and varied stresses. In addition to this every conveying
problem is different and needs careful planning and selection of the right ele-
m ents in order to achieve the optim um conveying capacity in an econom ical
w ay.
There are a num ber of practical rules, values and experiences w hich can be
useful during the planning stage. This m anual aim s to be of assistance to
operators, engineers and project people and provides a substantial am ount of
elem entary data. In addition there are a num ber of instructions and hints
offered to enable accurate calculations or checks on installation com ponents
that im pinge on the running of the belt.
In future there w ill be m ore and m ore use of the com puter for calculations
and dim ensioning of belt conveyors. W ith this often the correlation of the
valuation criteria w ill no longer be recognizable. This m anual should also help
to understand the background to a calculation, the selection criteria for an
optim um belt type and to recognize a special operating case.
A ll new standards D IN , EN , or ISO , have been taken into consideration as
w ell as the results of individual research studies. The developm ents continue
and w e are grateful for all hints and practical experiences.
July 1994
Foreword
1.2
Introduction
U ntil the m id 1970s conveyor belt developm ent and technology w as concen-
trated on the search for appropriate m aterials for the belt and the solving of
drive problem s. In the first instance transm ission of traction played a part. A s
the dem and grew for conveyors of larger capacity and longer length, addition-
al requirem ents effecting the belt had to be considered and researched such
as greater w ork load, elongation, slit resistance and endless splice jointing.
from 1870 Trials w ith plain cotton belts.
up to 1914 First rubber conveyor belts developed from drive belts.
1921 Founding of the Enerka factory. M anufacture of drive belts
and later conveyor belts.
1923/1924 First use of belts underground, not a success due to drive
problem s.
1926 First belts w ith robust B alata reinforced covers.
from 1928 U se of belts w ith M aco cotton plies.
from 1933 D evelopm ent of R ayon/cotton belts and pure rayon belts.
Transition from natural rubber to synthetic rubber for protec-
tion of carcase.
from 1939 Increased use of rayon and synthetic rubber.
1941/1942 U se of PVC belts above ground.
1942 Steelcord belts used for the first tim e for m ajor long haul
installations in the U nited States.
from 1945 Further developm ent of rayon belts.
Introduction of m ixed m aterial fabrics includes synthetic w eft.
1954/1955 D evelopm ent of high tensile strength belts e.g. plies from
rayon, polyam ide and polyester. C over rubbers w ith various
surface designs. Steep incline belting w ith profiles and cleats.
from 1955 D evelopm ent and use of steel cord belting in Europe.
from 1970 U se of A ram ide as reinforcing m aterial for the carcase
from 1980 D evelopm ent of new conveyor system s e.g. the tube
conveyor, ham m ock conveyor.
This brief history illustrates the m ore im portant stages in conveyor belt deve-
lopm ent. The search for new m aterials becam e necessary because of the
ever increasing dem ands to optim ise installation construction such as pulley
diam eters, vertical and horizontal curves etc. and the dem ands of new
conveying system s.
Optimising conveyor belt reinforcing materials i.e. exploit to their
m axim um strength lim its to obtain optim um w orking life econom y.
Optimum dimensioning of installation com ponents e.g. pulley diam eters,
idlers, bearings and shafts, troughing transitions, drive and take-up system s.
Adaptation of cover quality to each duty i.e. cover quality to provide
optim um solution at the m ost econom ical cost.
M anufacture of conveyor belts and installation construction w ith the
environment in mind.
Chronological
Development
Development Goals
1.3
Introduction
To assist in future developm ent of new belt types and splice joining techni-
ques, D unlop-Enerka have developed and installed a new type of belt testing
rig. The principal intention of the testing m ethods is to sim ulate actual opera-
ting conditions encountered by a belt in service.
W ith this rig it is possible to sim ulate changing stresses, bending changes,
apply m axim um pre-tension, use various pulley diam eters, observe belt slip to
capacity lim its etc. A nalysing the test data can enable optim um use to be
m ade of conveyor belt m aterials and belt conveyors thereby providing m ore
econom ical operations.
DUNLOP-ENERKA
Belt Testing Rig
2.1
Belt Conveyor
A n installation consists of a drive system , a take-up system , additional com -
ponents and the principal item , the conveyor belt. In addition to the conven-
tional conveyor there are other conveyor system developm ents in w hich the
belt is the conveying elem ent.
Construction
B asic Sketch
C om ponents
Explanation
16
24
25
17
B elt conveyor-fixed position
M obile conveyor
W ith w heels
W ithout w heels
Flat conveying
Troughed conveying
34
33
1 M otor
2 M otor C oupling
3 B rake
4 D rive Transm ission
5 A nti R unback
6 D rive C oupling
7 Pulley B earings
8 D rive Pulley
9 Tail Pulley
10 D eflection or Snub Pulley
11 Im pact Idler G arland
12 C arrying Side Idler
13 R eturn Side Idler
14 G uide R oller
15 C ounter W eight Take-up
16 Screw Take-up
17 Take-up W eight
18 B elt R un C ounter
19 O ff Track C ontrol
20 B elt Steering Idler
21 Pull W ire
22 Em ergency Sw itch
23 C onveyor B elt
24 B rush R oller
25 Scraper
26 Plough
27 D ecking Plate
28 C ow l (H ead G uard)
29 B affle B ar
30 D elivery C hute
31 C hute Lining
32 Skirt B oard
33 U pper B elt Location
34 Low er B elt Location
3.1
Drive Systems
A drive system consists of all com ponents that provide for driving, start-up
and braking forces. The transm ission of traction pow er from the drive pulley
is dependent upon the follow ing factors:
Angle of wrap the belt makes on the drive pulley
Friction coefficient between belt and drive pulley
Pre Tension T
v
.
The above sketches of drive system s and belt paths are of the classical and
m ost frequently used types. A dditionally there are a num ber of new proven
developm ents or those w hich are still undergoing trials, for instance, tube
conveyors, piggy-back conveyors, clam p conveyors, aerobelt conveyors, loop
belt conveyors and others.
H ere are som e exam ples:
Drive Systems
Pulley A rrangem ent
and B elt Path
C onveyor System s
Eintrommel-Antrieb mit direktem Abwurf
Eintrommel-Antrieb mit Schwenkarm und
Abwurfausleger
Eintrommel-Antrieb mit Abwurfausleger
Zweitrommel-Kopfantrieb mit Schwenkarm
und Abwurfausleger
Zweitrommel-Kopfantrieb mit direktem Abwurf
Eintrommel-Kopfantrieb
mit Eintrommel-Umkehrantrieb
Zweitrommel-Kopfantrieb
mit Eintrommel-Umkehrantrieb
Loop B elt C onveyor A erobelt C onveyor
(FM W System ) System
C onveyor belt
M aterial
C onveying
Through
A irinlet
A ir Film
D rive m otors
H angers
D rive R ollers
M aterial Load
Loop B elt w ith C lam p Edges
Single pulley drive w ith direct discharge
Single pulley drive w ith sw ivel arm and
discharge jib
Single pulley drive w ith discharge jib
Single pulley head drive w ith single pulley
tail drive
D ual pulley head drive w ith direct discharge
D ual pulley head drive w ith single pulley
tail drive
D ual pulley head drive w ith sw ivel arm and
discharge jib
3.2
Drive Systems
The single pulley head drive is the m ost com m on and preferred drive. For
light duty applications the Motorized Conveyor Pulley or V-rope Drive is
often used.
U nder norm al circum stances the drive unit com prises m otor, coupling and
gear box located at the side of the drive pulley and connected by m eans of a
flexible coupling, flanged coupling or extension gear box. W ith higher duty
applications the drive units can be located on both sides of the drive pulley.
For the higher duty applications the dual pulley drive is used w hich enables an
increase in angle of w rap and traction transm ission. 2 to 4 drives are possible
w hich as a rule for reasons of standardization, w ould be of the sam e size.
B y distributing the drive pow er in the ratio of 1:1 or 1/3 : 2/3, the transm ission
capability of the first pulley w ould not be fully utilized. A ll m otors take approxi-
m ately the sam e w ork load. A lm ost the sam e size w ork load can be achieved
by selecting a fluid coupling w hose slip characteristic can be m odified by
adjusting the volum e of fluid in the w orking circuit. If slip ring m otors are
used this can be achieved by adjusting the slip resistance.
The head and tail drive m ay be used for relatively long installations, reversible
drives or w here high return side resistance can occur. Start-up and braking is
m ade easier on long installations. The tail drive overcom es the resistances to
m otion on the return side run, the pre-tension at the head drive can be
increased.
The choice of drive system depends on the total w orking duty, the belt char-
acteristics and general operating conditions. W ith the higher duties the drive
pulley is driven on both sides. The pulley shaft is then sym m etrically used and
able to take a higher loading.
W ith m ulti-pulley drives the belt should be so reeved that the pulley side is
leading over the drive pulley. In situations of high belt stress additional
deflection of the belt should be avoided thereby preventing unnecessary
bending stresses.
O ne should be particularly aw are of dirt build-up. Prom pt cleaning can avoid
dow n tim e and repair costs.
Single Pulley H ead D rive
D ual Pulley H ead D rive
H ead and Tail D rive
General Criteria
P1 P2
3.3
Drive Systems
In principle there are three possibilities for conveyor belt driving system s.
For use on sm all to m edium duty applications. These are distinguished by
their com pact construction. A s a rule in the range of approxim ately 20 kW to
a m axim um of 100 kW w here pulley diam eters up to 1400 m m are used and
belt speeds in the range 0.02 to 5 m /s.
The heat loss is m inim al particularly w ith lagged pulleys.
U tilized up to approxim ately 30 kW , special applications up to approxim ately
120 kW . Possibilities are spur gearing, angle drive, w orm gearing. C om pact
and frequently used for light duty applications.
The geared m otor is connected to the drive drum by a flexible or fixed
coupling.
D rive units com prising these three com ponents are used the m ost. Typical
are w ork loads up to 600 kW w ith m axim um s up to approxim ately 1500 kW .
The advantage of this arrangem ent is the good accessibility and interchange-
ability of com ponents and favourable spares inventory etc.
In m ost cases, especially on large installations, coupling and brake are built
into the drive unit.
A s a rule a belt conveyor has to operate under variable load conditions. The
drive capability has to take account of these changes, also m ust run at con-
stant revolutions and even speed.
This type of m otor is sim ple to build, is robust and econom ical. The high tor-
que w hen starting can be m inim ised and adjusted by m eans of flexible coup-
lings, fluid couplings and slip couplings. Sm all installations up to approxim ate-
ly 10-12 kW can run w ithout interm ediate coupling. The high stresses
im posed upon the system during loaded start-up can be lim ited by step by
step increases in resistance or by the Star D elta reduced voltage system .
W ith this type of m otor the starting torque can be reduced by the increase of
resistances w ithin the electrical circuit.
The slip ring m otor is used on large installations if a quasi stationary gentle
start-up is required.
Drive Components
Pulley Motor
Geared Motor
Motor Gears Coupling
Drive Motor
Squirrel Cage Motor
Slip Ring Motor
M otor C oupling G earbox
4.1
Couplings
W hen starting up a belt conveyor, for a short tim e forces result w hich are hig-
her than those w hich occur during norm al running conditions e.g. start-up and
acceleration forces. The m otor in contrast creates by far the greater start-up
torque. The difference betw een the load torque and the start-up torque of the
m otor, is the acceleration torque.
D epending on the size and type of m otor, a gentle start-up is provided w hen
a flexible or hydraulic coupling is used.
Rigid couplings are used only on sm all
installations up to a m axim um of 30 kW
and at slow speeds.
Flexible couplings of diverse construction
are already built into 16-20 kW units.
Centrifugal and magnetic type couplings w ith controlled torque are hardly
ever used because of their high cost and are no longer a significantly used
item for belt start-up.
Fluid couplings or hydraulic couplings are often used for larger drives in
com bination w ith squirrel cage m otors. They perm it a load free acceleration
of the m otor and consequently w ith increasing oil fill, provide a gentle quasi
steady state start-up of the belt conveyor. The m axim um torque occurring
during the start-up process is restricted to low est possible level. The convey-
or belt and splice joints are relieved and conserved.
Em pty at R est Full at Start-up Full W orking
(Principle of the VO ITH Turbo coupling w ith delay cham ber)
Coupling Types
R igid C oupling
Flexible C ouplings
C entrifugal C ouplings
H ydraulic C oupling
The principle of
a Turbo coupling
4.2
Couplings
The electric m otor produces a variable torque w ith speed of rotation w hich is
illustrated below by line M . The belt conveyor as a w orking unit opposes tor-
que M
M
at the sam e rotational speed set against torque M
L
.
A t the m om ent of sw itch on, the electric m otor delivers the start-up torque
M
A
. W hen this happens, the belt conveyor dem ands the break aw ay torque
M
LB
. A s rotation increases the m otor torque declines to saddle torque M
S
and then increases to the brink torque M
K
. Thereafter the torque at the nom i-
nal speed of rotation reduces to the nom inal torque of the m otor M
N
. The
load increases steadily.
The difference betw een the m otor torque M
M
and the load torque M
L
is the
acceleration torque M
B
up to the torque intersection of both lines.
The start-up of the electric m otor occurs practically load free com pared w ith
the coupling torque M
K
up to the cut-off point 1 of the graph line M
K
and the
load graph line M
L
.
The m otor rem ains at point 2 and accelerates the belt conveyor up to syn-
chronous speed. Thereafter the m otor, the coupling and the belt conveyor
reach the drive speed of rotation at point 3. This type of coupling is only
effective on a high speed shaft.
The start-up torque is reached by a continuous filling of the coupling from 0 to
break aw ay torque w ithin a period of approxim ately 10 to 20 seconds. Thus
the belt is slow ly tensioned and longitudinal vibrations are avoided.
Start-up Procedure
Squirrel C age M otor w ith
Fixed C ouplings
Squirrel C age M otor
w ith H ydraulic C oupling
M
A
Start-up Torque M otor
M
S
Saddle Torque M otor
M
K
B rink Torque M otor
M
N
N om inal Torque M otor
M
Lb
B reak A w ay Torque
M
L
Load Torque
M
B
A cceleration Torque
M
M
M otor Torque
M
L
Load Torque
M
K
C oupling Torque
M
A
M
S
M
K
M
N
M
B
M
L
M
Lb
M
M
M
L
M
K
1
3
2
R evolutions n
R evolutions n
T
o
r
q
u
e

M
T
o
r
q
u
e

M
4.3
Couplings
A holdback device is necessary if the force due to the loaded incline of a con-
veyor F
St
exceeds that of the peripheral force F
H
stem m ing from conveying
the load over the horizontal distance. This is the case w ith all steeply inclined
conveyors and w ith those having a decline of approxim ately 6 to 10.
F
St
(N ) Incline Force
F
H
(N ) Force due to H orizontal C onveying
m
L
(Kg/m ) M ass of Load Stream on B elt
m
R
(Kg/m ) M ass of R otating C arrying Idler R ollers
L (m ) C onveyor Length
H (m ) H eight D ifference
f (-) A rtificial Friction Factor
g (m /s
2
) A cceleration due to gravity
D uring installation a check should be m ade as to w hether the direction of pul-
ley rotation corresponds w ith the free w heeling direction of rotation and that
reverse travel of the belt is no longer possible.
Holdback
SU PER FO R T B elt in Service
C onveying O verburden
F
St
> F
H
( N )
F
St
= H
*
g
*
m
L
( N )
F
H
= f
*
L
*
g ( m
L
+ m
R
) ( N )
stands fast
free locked
5.1
Drive Pulley
The belt tensions required for frictional transm ission of peripheral force F
U
are:
T
1
= Entry side force = Tight side tension
T
2
= Leaving side force = Slack side tension
B ecause of the friction coefficient betw een belt and pulley, T
1
is greater than
T
2
. The difference betw een both forces is peripheral force F
U
.
O n braking the forces are reversed.
In the extrem e case of friction cut off that is, if the slip lim it is about to be
reached and the angle of w rap is fully utilized, then at the lim it of slip
T
1
decreases along the angle of w rap to the value of T
2
over a logarithm ic
spiral.
From the form ulae for peripheral force F
U
and T
1
the follow ing relationships
can be derived:
c
1
and c
2
are the drive factors.
If the peripheral force F
U
is greater than the transm ission capability according
to the Eytelw ein theory borderline conditions, then the drive pulley over runs
and slip occurs.
D uring the reduction of tension from T
1
to T
2
along the service arc, a decrea-
se in the belt stretch occurs. It is not proportional to the tim e it occurs at a
slow er rate. C reep rem ains on the pulley circum ference and often creates a
w histling sound.
Entry side speed = pulley peripheral speed.
Leaving side speed < entry side speed.
Force Transmission
Eytelw ein Lim itations
Slip
C reep
F
U
= T
1
- T
2
or T
1
= F
U
+ T
2
T
1
! e
or T
1
! T
2 *
e
T
2
1
T
1
= F
U *
( 1 + ) = F
U *
c
1
e
- 1
1
T
2
= F
U *
( ) = F
U *
c
2
e
- 1
T
1
T
2
F
U
T
2
A
n
g
l
e
o
f
w
r
a
p
S
p
i
r
a
l
e

l
o
g
.
A
n
g
le
o
f
r
e
p
o
s
e
N
T
1
T
1
T
1
m ax
5.2
Drive Pulley
The factors determ ining the transm ission of peripheral force F
u
are the fric-
tion coefficient, the angle of w rap and the pretension T
2
e.g. T
v
.
The num ber of drive pulleys, the pretension force as w ell as various other
installation components are dependent upon the friction coefficient . In
order to assess the friction coefficient, full know ledge of the operation is
desirable. In practice the friction coefficient varies w ithin lim its w hich are
dependent upon:
Surface condition of the pulley
Lubricating m aterial such as w ater
or load slim e betw een belt and pulley
Tem perature
Surface pressure
Slip and creep speed
The friction coefficient declines w ith increasing surface pressure and increa-
ses w ith increasing speed of creep for instance at start-up.
The angle of w rap can be increased by m eans of a snub pulley to a m axim um
of 230. B y using tw o drive pulleys an angle of up to approxim ately 450 can
be achieved.
Friction Coefficient
Angle of Wrap

O perating
C ondition
Plain Steel
(sm ooth)
Polyurethane
lagging
(grooved)
R ubber lagging
(grooved)
C eram ic lagging
(porous)
Pulley Surface
D ry 0.35 to 0.4
W et
(C lean)
0.1
W et (dirty
m ud, clay)
0.05 to 0.1
0.35 to 0.4
0.35
0.2
0.4 to 0.45
0.35
0.25 - 0.3
0.4 to 0.45
0.35 to 0.4
0.35
! 180 ! 230
1
+
2
! ca. 450
coefficient de frottem ent
F
a
c
t
e
u
r
s

d
e

c
o
m
m
a
n
d
e
c
1
c
2
c
1
c
2
arc de contact
c
1
c
2
c
1
c
2
A ngle of w rap
D
r
i
v
e

F
a
c
t
o
r
s
Friction coefficient

From the graph the follo-

w ing relationships can be
derived.
A n increase in value over
0.35 does not result in any
great advantage from c
1
and c
2
.
W ith friction coefficient
value less than 0.3 an
increase of the angle is
an im provem ent from c
1
and c
2
.
Values and take into
account the values of
and w ith the sam e value
of drive factors c
1
or c
2
.
6.1
Take-up Systems
B elt conveyors are equipped w ith take-up (tension) devices. These are
necessary to m ake it possible for the transm ission of force on the drive pulley
or to accom m odate changes in the length of the belt as the load changes and
to provide a sm ooth start-up of the installation. The choice of take-up system
depends on the general conditions of the installation, the elongation char-
acteristics of the belt, the start up behaviour, climate and perhaps the
conveying distance and the inclination of the installation.
D epending on the application one differentiates betw een:
Fixed take-up
M oveable take-up w ith a constant pre-tension provided by a gravity w eight
or w ith a pre-tension regulated by m otor
This sim ple take-up device is used for relatively short conveyor lengths or
w ith belts having a low elongation such as steelcord. A fter tensioning the
belt, the length stays constant but the belt pull force changes according to
the change in load through perm anent or elastic stretch.
The level of pre-tension force can be determ ined practically by tensioning the
belt until the forces react at all parts of the installation. The belt is perm anen-
tly tensioned sufficiently high as is necessary for full load conditions. It is
possible to ascertain and actually adjust the tension by m eans of a sensor.
O n longer installations a m oveable gravity w eight tension device is used.
W ith this a constant pre-tension is achieved at all parts of the installation.
The length changes of the belt are evened out in the take-up travel. It m ust
be determ ined in such a w ay as to accom m odate those changes i.e. addition-
ally to perm anent belt elongation.
A value for take-up travel w ith textile carcase belts is approxim ately 1.5%
based on conveyor centre to centre distance and w ith steelcord belts
approxim ately 0.3% .
W ith especially long installations or to reduce start-up vibrations of belt, so
called regulated take-up w inches are used. B y m eans of electric sw itching a
pre-run of the take-up w inch, before the belt start-up, is achieved. D uring
start-up the pre-tension is kept above nom inal value. A fter reaching the ste-
ady running condition the w inch is adjusted so as to provide the nom inal
value of pre-tension.
General
Fixed Take-up D evice
G ravity W eight
R egulated Take-up W inch
7.1
Detection Devices
For the operation of com plex belt conveyor installations a range of safety
devices w ere developed. They serve to prevent accidents, to guard the
conveyor belt and to run and automizethe com plete installation.
This device detects the belt tension changes during different w orking condi-
tions such as starting, braking and load variations.
A tensiom eter m easures the changing belt tensions. A s soon as the defined
lim its of the upper and low er belts tensions are exceeded a signal is transm it-
ted to the take-up unit.
A n off-track of the belt can be lim ited or corrected by m eans of a num ber of
m echanical devices. A nother possibility is to track the belt w ith light beam s.
If a deviation beyond the defined lim its is detected a m otorized steering sys-
tem is set into operation. If the off-track is not adjusted the installation is
brought to a halt.
W ith the help of this device the overloading of a transfer point is registered.
A contact probe is suspended in the chute and adjusted to the required m ate-
rial flow . W ith an overload, contact is m ade w ith the probe and the installa-
tion is sw itched off.
This device detects the force transm ission betw een belt and drive pulley.
Too great or too long a duration of slip leads to overheating of the pulley sur-
face w hich can lead to fire. Slip can occur m ore often at start up as w ell as
overload conditions or w hen the pre-tension is too low .
Slitting open of conveyor belts is a relatively frequent cause of dam age w hich
leads to prolonged interruptions and incurs great costs. In m ost cases it
stem s from sharp edged pieces of m aterial being trapped in the transfer
chute.
To avoid such dam age the follow ing rem edies are possible.
Textile or Steel breaker ply em bedded in the cover rubber
B unched steel cords are em bedded in the carrying side cover set at fixed
spacing.
R ip detection loops at approxim ately 50 to 100m spacings vulcanised into
the belt.
C arcase w ith a high resistance to longitudinal slittings such as D unlop
FER R O FLEX belt orD U N LO PLA ST belt.
Belt tension detection
Off track detection
Chute detection
Belt Slip detection
Longitudinal Slitting
Safety Device
Illustration of the transverse
reinforcem ent in a FER R O FLEX B elt
8.1
Cleaning Devices
B elt conveyors w hen operating need to be cleaned constantly depending on
the type and characteristics of the load residues w hich stick to the carrying
side of the belt. The return idlers get dirty w hich leads to further encrusting
of idlers and pulleys. The consequences are, am ongst others:
loss of load
soiling of the installation
damage to the belt
off tracking of the belt
damage to idlers
The belt cleaning requires special m easures having regard to:
material characteristics such as, dry, damp, sticky, granulated
degree of cleaning, rough to `clinically clean
The material from which the scraper is m ade has to be in accord w ith the
type of belt and the m aterial to be scraped off.
The follow ing need to be observed:
the hardness of the belt and scraper;
In general the m aterial from w hich the scraper is m ade should not be har-
der than the belt surface. The scraper should be designed in such a w ay
that it m akes contact w ith the biggest possible area of the belt, perhaps a
double or staggered scraper.
the contact pressure of the scraper;
A n excessive contact pressure increases energy consum ption and w ear
and tear of the belt. A sm all gap betw een the scraper and belt surface pro-
vides a sufficient cleaning effect w ith m ost bulk loads, causing m inim um
w ear and tear. Sliding friction becom es rolling friction.
In nearly every case the m ost effective and econom ic solution has to be esta-
blished, possibly by trial and error. Several w ell proven system s are listed as
follow s.
General
Basic rules
TR IO FLEX B elt in operation
on G arland Idlers
8.2
Cleaning Devices
Steel cords tensioned transversely
over the belt carrying side behind point
of discharge for coarse cleaning of stic-
ky m aterial such as loam , clay and the
like.
Fixed or m oveable also possible as a
double bladed scraper.
U sed for m oderately sticky m aterial
B ig contact area.
For cleaning the under side of the belt
often located before tail pulleys. In
special cases it can be used in double
bladed form . A lso prevents m aterial
from running into the tail pulley.
U sed for rough cleaning im m ediately
at the discharge pulley.
A djustable versions are available.
U sed for nearly all non-sticky m aterials.
C an be adjusted depending on the load
and desired degree of cleaning.
R otating, partly self driven brushes
w ith rubber or nylon bristles. N ot suit-
able for sticky m aterials such as clay or
loam .
Piano Wire Scraper
Transverse Scraper
Fan Scraper
Plough Scraper
Scratch Action Scraper
Staggered Scraper
Rotary Scraper
8.3
Cleaning Devices
H orizontally rotating scraper located on
return run. R ing scraper in slightly tilted
position - belt driven.
Situated on the belt running side loca-
ted in the region of the discharge hop-
per. For belts w ith a profiled carrying
side and steep inclined belts.
Located at inaccessible areas such as bridges, tunnels or over-passes. The
belt is turned over on the return side so that the dirty carrying side is upper-
m ost.
G ood cleaning m ethod w here good w ater supply and drainage are available.
Rotary Scraper
Rapping Roller
Belt turnover
High Pressure Water
Pulley side C arrying side
Turnover Length
9.1
Load
It is im portant to know the exact make-up and material component of the
load w hen constructing a conveyor installation. The choice of conveyor belt
is determ ined by the physical and chemical properties of the materials
and possibly by safety regulations and dem ands.
D usty, granular or lum ps. Loads for instance, stone, earth, sand, grain,
cem ent. They are defined by their physical characteristics such as density,
granulom etry, m oisture, oil and fat content, pH value, abrasiveness, angle of
surcharge etc.
Piece loads com prise such as boxes sacks, blocks etc., and are defined by
shape, m easurem ent and w eight.
It is the quotient of the m ass and volum e V of the bulk load
If a load is loosely poured a static angle of slope
st
w ill form . If the under
layer is m oved as w hen being transported on a conveyor belt, the angle of
surcharge
dyn
is form ed. The particles of the bulk load interact and the
low er the internal friction of the m aterial the low er the surcharge angle
dyn
.
A pproxim ately:
The surcharge angle is only to a degree related to material size. It depends
on the friction betw een m aterial and belt, how the m aterial is loaded and the
geom etry of the conveyor installation. The tabulated values in the A ppendix
are approxim ate values. If exact values are necessary they have to be deter-
m ined by practical trials.
A s a measure of granulometry or lump size the m axim um diagonal corner
to corner dim ensions k are used.
W hichever is the predom inant granulation or lum p size decides w hether the
bulk load is sized or unsized.
General
Bulk Loads
Unit Loads
Bulk Density
Angle of repose
Surcharge
Granulometry k
M easurem ent
m
= ( t/m
3
)
V
dyn
= (0.5 - 0.9)
*
st
Sized load k
m ax
/ k
m in
! 2.5
U nsized load k
m ax
/ k
m in
> 2.5
G ranulom etry k = 0.5 ( k
m ax
+ k
m in
)
B ulk Load D efinition G ranulom etry (m m )
D ust 0.5
G ranular 0.5 - 10
Lum ps 10 - 200
Large Lum ps > 200
kk
9.2
Load
It is im portant to have as near accurate as possible know ledge of the load
temperature and ambient conditions in order to select the optim um cover
quality and in certain circum stances the layout of particular installation com -
ponents.
Further influencing factors are:
Granulometry of the material and hence the contact density m ade w ith
the belt.
The speed of the belt and therefore the heating up and cooling off
times.
Whether installation is open or enclosed.
The moisture content of the material has an influence on the surcharge
angle
dyn
, the friction value betw een m aterial and belt and thus the m axi-
m um angle of inclination of an installation. It is difficult to give an exact
assessm ent and if necessary practical trials need be conducted. The m oistu-
re content is m easured in percentage.
A sound know ledge of the chem ical characteristics of the load is necessary
w hen selecting the cover quality and also the carcase reinforcem ent.
Im portant are the proportions of oils and fats (m ineral and vegetable) and
acidity.
The tem perature of the chem ical m aterial as w ell as the proportion of acidity
influences the level of attack m ade on the belt cover.
The pH value is the concentration of hydrogen ions w hich are present in a
solution e.g. the negative exponent to base 10 of the concentration (hydrogen
exponent).
The neutral point is pH = 7
U nder 7 indicates acidity
O ver 7 indicates alkalinity (bases)
The pH value indicates the degree of acidity or alkalinity and can be im portant
in selecting the cover quality.
The m axim um angle of inclination of a belt conveyor depends on the friction
value betw een m aterial and belt and the form of material. Large lum p and
m oist m aterial decrease the angle of inclination. The m ethod of loading such
as direction and rate of feeding are also im portant criteria. For m ost bulk
loads and belts w ith a sm ooth carrying surface, the limit anglelies betw een
18 and 20. For steeper inclinations up to 90, profiled belts, belts w ith cle-
ats or elevator belts are used.
Temperature
Moisture
Chemical Characteristics
pH Value
Angle of Inclination
c
a
.

9
0
c
a
.

8
5
c
a
.

4
0
c
a
. 3
5
ca. 22
pH > 7 alkalis
pH = 7 neutral
pH < 7 acid
Sm ooth B elts
Sidew all B elting: w ith Vertical C leats
w ith Tilted C leats
w ith B ucket C leats
Elevators
Steep Inclining B elts: M ultiprof

C H EVR O N
H IG H -C H EVR O N
Profile B elts: H erringbone
R ufftop
10.1
Conveyor Belt
The conveyor belt is the most important element of a belt conveyor instal-
lation. It has to be capable of doing num erous tasks:
A bsorb the stresses developed at drive start-up.
Transport the load.
A bsorb the im pact energy at the loading point.
W ithstand tem perature and chem ical effects (heat, oil and fat containing
m aterials, acidity etc.).
M eet safety requirem ents (flam e resistant, antistatic etc.).
The conveyor belt consists of the follow ing com ponents:
Carcaseconsisting of textile plies, steel w eave or steel cord.
Covers in different qualities of rubber or PVC .
Additional components (as required) such as edge protection, im pact pro-
tection, longitudinal slitting prevention etc.
Special construction elements like profiles on steep incline belts, cleats
or corrugated edges etc.
A ll item s m entioned above should be considered carefully. The selection of
the belt specification depends on the application.
Schem atic C onstruction of a Plied B elt
General
Belt construction
C arcase of
textile plies
Pulley Side
C over
B reaker Ply or
Longitudinal Slit
Preventor
C arrying
Side C overs
Full R ubber Edge
10.2
Conveyor Belt
The carcase can be m ade from various m aterials and in different construc-
tions. The m ost frequently used are textile ply carcases and Steel C ord.
D U N LO FLEX TR IO FLEX SU PER FO R T
2 Ply 3 Ply M ulti Ply
D U N LO PLA ST
FER R O FLEX
SILVER C O R D
For textile, solid w oven or steel reinforced types the principal m aterials used
are as follow s:
Carcase
C arcase w ith one or m ore
textile plies
(up to a m axim um of 6 ply)
C arcase of the Solid
w oven type. M onoply belts
C arcase of the Steel
w eave type
C arcase w ith Steel
C ords. ST-belts
M aterial
D unloplast B elts have a PVC im pregnated
textile carcase of m onoply construction.
D epending on tensile strength and duty the
carcase fibres are in polyester, polyam ide or
aram id.
The transm ission of force is by m eans of the
longitudinal steelcords laid next to one another
in the sam e plain. A bove this carcase is a
transverse layer also of steel w hich is held in
place by a polyam ide binder cord.
W ith this belt force is transm itted via steel
cords of the appropriate strength. The cords
are transversely bound together by an inter-
m ediate layer of rubber only.
Transverse Elem ents serve to prevent im pact
dam age or longitudinal slitting.
Sym bol Ply M aterials
B C otton (N atural fibre)
P Polyam ide (Synthetic fibre)
E Polyester (Synthetic fibre)
EP Polyester-Polyam ide (Synthetic fibre)
D A ram id (Synthetic fibre)
F Steel W eave (Ferroflex)
ST Steel C ord (ST belt)
C over
C ore R ubber
Steelcord
10.3
Conveyor Belt
O f the textile ply types the wholly synthetic plies have proved to be the
best over the years e.g. polyester (E) in the warp (longitudinal direction)
and polyamide (P) in the weft (transverse direction). The abbreviation of
this ply construction is called EP.
C arcases from Aramid (D) are in developm ent and are high tensile and low
elongation carcases.
Steel Cord belts have very low elongation and are used predom inantly on
long haul installations.
Evaluation of various Material Properties
The carcase is protected against outside influences by the covers w hich are
norm ally m ade out of either rubber or PVC . The carrying side cover should
not be m ore than 3 tim es thicker than the running side cover.
W ith w holly synthetic and rot resistant plies it is not necessary to have full
rubber edge protection, it is sufficient to have heat sealed cut edges.
Exceptions are belts requiring special qualities such as oil and fat resistance.
The basic grades and principal properties are in accordance w ith ISO and D IN .
Various other special grades exclude laid dow n m echanical or other values.
Covers
C over Thickness R atio
B elt Edges
G rades
Key and evaluation of the plies
C haracteristics
B P E EP D F ST
Tensile Strength + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
A dhesion + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Elongation + + + + + + + + + + + + +
M oisture R esistance + + + + + + + + + +
Im pact R esistance + + + + + + + + +
= bad = m edium + = good + + = very good + + + = excellent
C arrying side : R unning Side " 3:1
D IN 22102 (A pril 1991)
C over grade W X Y Z
Tensile strength N /m m
2
m in. 18 25 20 15
B reaking elongation % 400 450 400 350
A brasion loss m m
3
m ax. 90 120 150 250
ISO 10247 (N ovem ber 1990)
C over grade H D L
Tensile strength N /m m
2
m in. 24 28 15
B reaking elongation % 450 400 350
A brasion loss m m
3
120 100 200
10.4
Conveyor Belt
The carrying side surfacedepends on the load, the inclination of the installa-
tion or depending on the use of the belt, sm ooth, profiled, cleated and w ith
corrugated edges.
M ultiprof Profile H IG H -C H EVR O N Profile
Special Q ualities
C over Surface
C haracteristics
Type
Flam e R esistant F
A nti Static E
Flam e R esistant, A nti Static S or K
H eat R esistant T
Low Tem perature R esistant R
O il and Fat R esistant G
Food Stuff A
C hem ical Products C
H erringbone Profile R ufftop Profile
10.5
Conveyor Belt
The thickness of the carrying side cover depends upon the nature of the load
and loading conditions (type of load, gradient, height of fall etc.).
G radient values
C arrying side
C over thickness
C over Thickness G auges
C over Surface B elt Type M ax. G radient A pplication
U nit and
Sm ooth N orm al 18 - 20 bulk loads
all types
Profiled Fishbone
up to 35
Piece and
R ufftop bulk loads
Steep conveyor Steep conveyor B ulk loads
profile C H EVR O N (non-sticky)
H IG H -C H EVR O N
up to 40
Piece loads
M ultiprof (sacks)
T-cleats B elts w ith Piece and
w ith or w ithout corrugated side up to 90 bulk loads
corrugated edges w alls, w ith or
w ithout T-C leats
W ith Steel
Elevator B ulk loads or rubber
belts
80 - 90
all types buckets attached
Load
W ooden crates
B ricks
Paper Sacks
Jute Sacks
Plastic B oxes-dry
Plastic B oxes-w et
40
40
35
35
40
25
30
30
30
35
30
25
G radient angle for conveyor belt w ith
R ufftop profile H erringbone profile
C over Thickness (m m )
C onveyor Load/D uty
C arrying Side Pulley Side
Light package C onveying 2 2
G ravel, Earth, Potash etc. 2 - 4 2 - 3
O re, B allast, C oal 4 - 8 2 - 3
Slag 4 - 8 2 - 3
C oarse ballast, coarse O re 8 - 12 3 - 5
large lum p C oal 8 - 12 3 - 5
10.6
Conveyor belt
Dunlop-Enerka
Cover Qualities
B asic m aterials C ode R ubber type
N R N atural R ubber
SB R Styrene-B utadiene R ubber
N B R N itrile R ubber
IIR B utyl R ubber
EPD M Ethylene-Propylene-D iene R ubber
C R C hloroprene R ubber
D unlop- Q uality Tem perature (C ) B asic C haracteristics
Enerka
Q uality D IN ISO . base A pplication
m in. duration m ax.
R A Y (N ) -30 80 100 SB R A brasion resistant, for norm al service
conditions encountered in carrying
bulk and aggregate m aterials.
R E X (M ) H -40 80 90 N R Extra abrasion resistant and cut
resistant for heavy duty service
conditions (sharp m aterials and
adverse loading conditions).
R S W D -30 80 90 N R /SB R Super abrasion resistant, for heaviest
service conditions, abrasive m aterials
w ith a large proportion of fines.
BETA- T -20 150 170 SB R H eat resistant, for m aterials at
H ETE m oderate tem peratures.
STAR- T -20 180 220 IIR Very heat resistant, for m aterials
H ETE w ith controlled high tem peratures.
D ELTA- T -20 200 400 EPD M Very heat resisant, for heavy duty
H ETE service conditions including abrasive
m aterials, at tem peratures up to
400C (or m ore) at tim es, e.g. som e
isolated burning m aterials or red-hot
cores, such as em bers, sinter, coke
etc.
R O S G -20 80 120 N B R O il and grease resistant, for oily
m aterials on m ineral oil base.
R O M G -30 80 90 SB R /N B R O il and grease resistant, for
vegetable oils and anim al greases.
M O R S G -20 80 90 SB R /N B R O il and grease resistant, for
vegetable oils and anim al greases,
and for heavy service conditions
of the cover.
B V S/K -30 80 90 C R /SB R Fire resistant for conveyance
of m aterials w ith fire and
explosion danger, such as
fertilizer
B VO S/G -20 80 90 C R /N B R Fire and oil resistant for
conveyance of oily m aterials
(vegetable oils and anim al
greases), e.g. fertilizer, cereals,
derivates etc.
The values apply to the m aterials tem peratures
O ther qualities for special applications are available on request.
10.7
Conveyor belt
Characteristics and areas of application
N atural rubber, because of its special properties is a good basic m aterial for
belt cover rubbers.
Technical Characteristics
Very good tensile strength and elongation
H igh heat resistance and elasticity
H igh tearing and shear strength
G ood abrasion resistance characteristics
Temperature Stability
G enerally stable w ithin the tem perature range of -30 to + 80C . W ith special
rubber com pounding a w idening of this range m ay be achieved from -40C to
+ 100C .
Chemical Stability
R esistant to w ater, alcohol, acetone, dilute acids and alkalis - lim ited resistan-
ce to concentrated acids and alkalis w here com pounding and service tem pe-
ratures are m ajor consideration.
Special characteristics
W ith special com pounding natural rubber based m ixes can be m ade antistatic
and flam e resistant.
B y adding antiozonants a substantial protection against harsh tem perature
effects, sunlight and am bient w eather conditions can be achieved.
Scope
Everyw here w here high physical properties are called for and the chem ical
and tem perature dem ands are not excessive.
SB R is a synthetic polym erisation product consisting of styrene and butadie-
ne w hose characteristics are sim ilar to natural rubber.
Tensile strength and cut resistance are good. A brasion, heat and ozone resi-
stances are better than natural rubber.
N B R is a copolym er of butadiene and acrylonitrile. It is not resistant to
Ketones, esters arom atics and hydrocarbons. The physical property values
are slightly low er than those of natural rubber. The tem perature operating
range can be controlled betw een -40C to + 120C . N B R is relatively abrasion
resistant, resistant to ageing and is used for oil and fat resistant belt covers.
B utyl rubber is a polym erisation product of Isobutylene and Isoprene. It has a
very good ozone and tem perature resistance.
In addition to a very good resistance to ageing, depending on com pounding, it
is able to w ithstand tem peratures of -30C to + 150C . It has a lim ited resis-
tance to acids and alkalis, anim al and vegetable fats. B utyl rubber is used
m ainly for heat resistant conveyor belting.
EPD M is tem perature resistant sim ilar to B utyl but w ith a considerably higher
resistance to w ear and tear. A dditionally EPD M has a better ozone resistance
than all other basic polym ers.
Basic Materials
N atural R ubber N R
Synthetic R ubber SB R
N itrile R ubber N B R
B utyl R ubber IIR
Ethylene Propylene R ubber
EPD M
C R is a Synthetic polym erisation product of C hlorobutadiene. The m echanical
properties are sim ilar to natural rubber but significantly better in respect of
ozone and oil resistance. The chlorine in C hloroprene gives the product a high
degree of flam e resistance.
The w orking tem perature range is -30C to + 80C .
The resistance to anim al and vegetable oils and fats is superior to natural rub-
ber as is the ageing resistance.
The use of N itrile in C hloroprene rubber enhances the dynam ic properties.
For cover rubber w hich requires a high oil and fat resistance w hether it be
anim al, vegetable or m ineral and also requiring superior m echanical proper-
ties. N C R is better than C R .
The foregoing basic materials are m ain ingredients of cover rubber com po-
nents. They provide the principal characteristics of each quality but can be
affected by the addition of other compounding ingredients to achieve requi-
rem ents of standards and regulations.
C onveyor belting is described according to laid dow n International standards.
A dditionally special types and qualities m ay be described by the m anufacturer
or in accordance w ith C ustom er w ishes.
The belt length is generally given in m etres either open or endless.
Open Length is the length around the pulleys plus an allow ance for m aking
endless.
Endless Length is the inside circum ference of the endless belt.
This num ber gives the nom inal or breaking strength of the carcase in N/mm
of belt w idth. The values are Internationally Standardized.
The nom inal strength of the carcase is m ade up by a num ber of plies. The
m onoply belt has a solid w oven carcase.
The nom inal tensile strength of the full thickness carcase is the sum of the
ply strengths rounded up to the next nom inal tensile strength. The num ber
of plies is not indicated in specially described types such as D U N LO FLEX,
TR IO FLEX orD U N LO PLA ST.
D D U N LO FLEX 2 Ply B elt F FER R O FLEX Steelw eave B elt
T TR IO FLEX 3 Ply B elt D LP D U N LO PLA ST M onoply B elt
S SU PER FO R T M ultiply B elt ST SILVER C O R D Steelcord B elt
10.8
Conveyor belt
C hloroprene R ubber C R
N itrile C hloroprene
R ubber N C R
N ote
Belt Description
B elt Length
DUNLOP types
N om inal Tensile Strength
the C arcase
N um ber of Plies
of Plies
O rdering Exam ple 100 m 800 m m EP 400/3 4+ 2 m m X
B elt Length
B elt W idth
M aterial (carcase)
N um ber of Plies
C arrying Side C over Thickness
Pulley Side C over Thickness
C over Q uality
125 160 200 250 315 400 500
630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500
63 80 100 125 160 200 250 315 400
11.1
Design
Main Data Values
Speed V
Standard Values
R ecom m ended
Velocity (m /s)
A fter establishing the duty of the operationand the type of belt conveyor,
the m ain data m ay be determ ined.
B elt Speed v (m /s)
B elt W idth B (m ) or (m m )
C arrying Idler A rrangem ent
C ross Sectional area of Load Stream A (m
2
)
C onveyor C apacity Q (t/h)
The belt or C onveying Speed V (m /s) m ust be appropriate for the material
compositionand operation conditions.
H igh Speed - N arrow er belt w idths
Low er belt tension
G reater w ear and tear
Low Speed - G reater belt w idths
H igher belt tension
Less w ear and tear
The m ost econom ical installation is that having the highest belt speed consis-
tent w ith the type of m aterial and operating conditions.
Speeds V (m /s)
0.42 - 0.52 - 0.66 - 0.84 - 1.05 - 1.31 - 1.68
2.09 - 2.62 - 3.35 - 4.19 - 5.20 - 6.60 - 8.40
D uty v (m /s)
U nit Loads, A ssem bly Lines ! 1.68
M obile C onveyors 0.52 - 1.68
Very dusty loads such as Flour, C em ent ! 1.31
A sh and R efuse ! 1.68
G rain, C rushed Lim estone 1.05 - 2.09
G ravel, Sand R eadym ix
O res, B itum inous C oal, Sinter
Storage and transhipm ent, Pow er Stations 1.31 - 3.35
Long distance conveying, overburden 2.62 - 6.60
B row n coal
Throw er belts # 8.40
Steep gradient belts 0.84 - 2.62
Type C H EVR O N and H IG H C H EVR O N
11.2
Design
W herever possible a standard belt w idth should be selected. Type and granu-
lom etry of the m aterials determ ine the minimum belt width. A fter determ i-
ning the belt type a check on troughability m ay be necessary under som e
circum stances.
W ith unsized m aterial the large lum ps are em bedded in the sm aller granula-
ted m aterial.
The disposition of the carrying idler varies from application to application. The
num ber of idler rolls in a carrying idler set and troughing angle determ ine the
cross sectional areaof the load stream and thus the conveying capacity.
In deciding on the carrying idler spacing one has to take account of the load
lim itation of the carrying idler (note: R efer to m anufacturers specification).
A fter establishing the belt tension the belt sagbetw een idler rollers has to be
checked.
The roller spacing has to be selected in such a w ay that the sag of a loaded
belt is no m ore than 0.5% -1.5% of the centre to centre distance. W ith return
side idlers one m ay allow approxim ately 2-3% sag.
Belt Width B
Standard W idths (m m )
M inim um B elt W idths
Carrying Idler Disposition
D istance betw een
C arrying Idlers
300 - 400 - 500 - 650 - 800 - 1000
1200 - 1400 - 1600 - 1800 - 2000 - 2200
M in. W idth Lum p Size K
(m m ) Sized U nsized
400 50 100
500 80 150
650 130 200
800 200 300
1000 250 400
1200 350 500
1400 400 600
1600 450 650
1800 550 700
2000 600 800
k
h
T
x T
x
l
o
l
u
T
x *
8
*
h
rel
l
o
= ( m )
(m
L
+ m
G
)
*
g
T
x *
8
*
h
rel
l
u
= ( m )
m
G *
g
T
x
( N ) B elt tension at point X
m
L
( kg/m ) W eight of load per m etre
m
G
( kg/m ) W eight of belt per m etre
g ( m /s
2
) G ravitational acceleration (9.81 m /s
2
)
h
rel
( - ) R elative belt sag
C arrying run : h
rel
= 0.005-0.015
R eturn run :h
rel
= 0.020-0.030
Flat 2 Part 3 Part D eep Trough G arland
C arrying Side
R eturn Side
11.3
Design
Idler rotation should not be greater than approxim ately 650 r.p.m .
The length of the m iddle idler roll determ ines the cross sectional area of the
load and thus the conveying capacity.
The gap d betw een 2 adjacent rolls should not be greater than 10m m , w ith
belt w idths B > 2000m m d = 15m m refer to D IN 22107, carrying idler arrange-
m ents.
Values for Idler Spacing
Idler Rotation
Standard
Idler Diameter (mm)
C arrying Side
l
o
= 0.5 1.0 m Sm all installation or high im pact
l
o
= app. 1.2 m N orm al installation
l
o
= 1.4 4.0 m H igh tension installation
R eturn Side
l
u
= (2-3)
*
l
o
M axim um approx 6 m
n
R =
60
*
v (r.p.m .)
D
R
D
R
( m ) R oll diam eter
v ( m /s ) B elt speed
C arrying Idlers 51 63.5 88.9 108 133 159 193.7 219
Im pact Idlers 156 180 215 250 290
R eturn R un
Support D iscs 120 138 150 180 215 250 290
Standard length L (mm) of rollers
B elt Troughing Type
W idth Flat 2 roll 3 roll D eeptrough G arland
B
(m m )
300 380 200 - - -
400 500 250 160 - -
500 600 315 200 - -
600 700 340 250 - -
650 750 380 250 - -
800 950 465 315 200 165
1000 1150 600 380 250 205
1200 1400 700 465 315 250
1400 1600 800 530 380 290
1600 1800 900 600 465 340
1800 2000 1000 670 530 380
2000 2200 1100 750 600 420
2200 2500 1250 800 640 460
l
B
l
d
l
d d
l
l
d
11.4
Design
FER R O FLEX C onveying B roken Stone
Form e dauge A ngle Section de char- C om parai-
dauge gem ent A (m
2
) son
plat 0,0483 44%
20 0,1007 91%
30 0,1145 104%
20 0,0935 85%
30 0,1100 100%
45 0,1247 113%
20 0,0989 90%
30 0,1161 106%
45 0,1284 117%
30/60 0,1329 121%
A uge profonde
G uirlande
11.5
Design
To determ ine the cross-sectional area of the load stream A , one m ay use as a
basis the geom etric relationship w hich can be constructed from the troughing
angle , the usable belt w idth b and the angle of surcharge .
For 1, 2 and 3 roll carrying idler sets, the part cross-sectional area can be cal-
culated as follow s:
Cross Sectional Area of
Load Stream
C ross-Sectional A rea of
Load Stream
Part C ross-Sectional
A rea
Cross Sectional Area
Comparison for Various
Forms of Troughing.
N ote:
The values for the cross sec-
tional area and the com pari-
son are for a belt w idth B =
1000 m m and for an angle of
surcharge = 15.
B
b
l
l
1
A
2
A
1
A = A
1
+ A
2
( m
2
)
A
1
= 0.25
*
tan
*
[ l + ( b - l )
*
cos ]
2
( m
2
)
A
2
= l
1 *
sin
*
[ l + l
1 *
cos ] ( m
2
)
l ( m ) Length of m iddle carrying roll
l
1
( m ) Loading w idth of outer rolls
l
1
= 0.5 ( b - l ) for 3 roll idler sets
l
1
= 0.5 ( b - 3
*
l )for 5 roll G arland sets
b ( m )U sable belt w idth (loadstream w idth)
b = 0.9
*
B - 50 m m for belts B ! 2000 m m
b = B - 250 m m for belts B > 2200 m m
( ) Troughing A ngle
( ) Surcharge A ngle
Troughing Form
Troughing
A ngle
Load C ross Sec-
tion A rea A (M
2
)
C om pari-
son
Flat
D eep Trough
G arland
0.0483
0.1329
0.1007
0.1145
0.0935
0.1100
0.1247
0.0989
0.1161
0.1284
11.6
Design
The conveying capacity is determ ined from the cross-sectional area A and
the belt speed v (m/s).
The effective or nominal load stream volume is determ ined from the
effective degree of filling. This takes account of w orking conditions and the
gradient of the installation.
The degree of filling is dependent upon the characteristics of the load, e.g.,
the lum p size, the surcharge angle and the w orking conditions, e.g, m ethod
of loading, tracking or the reserve capacity etc.
1
= 1 for norm al w orking conditions;
1
= 0.8 - 0.95 for adverse condition.
The reduction factor
2
takes into consideration the reduction in part cross-
sectional area A
1
as a result of the conveying gradient.
The load stream Q m (t/h) is calculated thus:
For the calculation of the conveying capacity for unit loads the follow ing
form ula applies.
Conveying Capacity
Load Stream Volum e
Effective D egree of Filling
D egree of Filling
1
Values for
1
R eduction Factor
2
for Sm ooth B elts
for Steep Incline B elts
For Bulk Loads
Load stream m ass
For Unit Loads
Q uantity conveyed
Load Stream
Q
V
= A
*
v
*
3600
*
( m
3
/h )
=
1 *
2
( - )
G radient 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22
2
1.0 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.93 0.91 0.89 0.85 0.81 0.76
Q
m
= Q
v *
( t/h ) Theoretical value
Q
m
= Q
v *

*
( t/h ) Effective value
3600
*
v
Q
st
= ( St/h - pieces per hour )
l
st
+ a
st
m
st *
3.6
*
v
Q
m
= ( t/h )
l
st
+ a
st
Q
V
( m
3
/h ) Volum e (values see A ppendix)
w ith v = 1 m /s
v ( m /s ) B elt Speed
( t/m
3
) B ulk density (see A ppendix)
m
st
( kg ) Piece W eight
l
st
( m ) Piece Length in direction of travel
a
st
( m ) Spacing of pieces
A ngle of inclination 15 20 25 30 35 40
Spharical rolling and coarse M aterial 0.89 0.81 0.70 0.56
Sticky m aterial 1.00 0.93 0.85 0.68 0.58 0.47
11.7
Design
This section deals w ith estimated values and relevant matters prim arily to
enable the Project Engineer to provide a speedy assessment of require-
m ents from the given service data. To m ake an optim um selection of the
conveyor belt and conveyor com ponents it is recom m ended that detailed cal-
culations be done in accordance w ith subsequent sections.
W ith the aid of the follow ing form ulae,power requirements can be roughly
assessed. The accuracy is sufficient for norm al installations w ith sim ple
straight-forw ard running conditions. From the pow er calculations, the belt
type can be closely determ ined. The actual nom inal belt w eight can be used
in the m ore precise calculation of the belt.
P3 is the sum of additional pow er for trippers, skirtboard friction, ploughs.
Standard electric motors (kW)
Power Requirements
A dditional Pow er
Installed M otor
Width factor C
B
P
T
= P
1
+ P
2
+ P
3
(kW )
C
B *
v + Q
m
P
1
= (kW )
C
L *
k
f
H
*
Q
m
P
2
= (kW )
367
R equired m otor pow er P
M
= P
T
/ (kW )
Q
m
( t/h ) m ass of load stream
v ( m /s ) belt speed
C
B
( kg/m ) w idth factor (see table)
C
L
( m
-1
) length factor (see table)
H ( m ) conveyor elevation H = sin
*
L
L ( m ) conveying length
( ) angle of inclination
k
f
( - ) Service factor (see table)
( - ) efficiency of the drive
= 0.9 for drives w ith fluid couplings
1.5 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5 11
15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55
75 90 110 132 160 200 250
315 400 500 630
D uty B ulk D ensity
(t/m 3)
Light
M edium
H eavy
U p to C a. 1.0
1.0 to 2.0
O ver 2.0
31 54 67 81 108 133 194 227 291
36 59 76 92 126 187 277 320 468 554 691 745
65 86 103 144 241 360 414 644 727 957 1033
B elt W idth B (m m )
300 400 500 650 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200
Pow er at D rive Pullley
Pow er for em pty C onveyor
and Load over the H orizontal
D istance
Pow er for Lift (or Fall)
P
N
selected m otor from standard list.
Trippers
(throw -off carraiges)
Scrapers
(for installations L ! 80 m )
M aterial - skirtboard
D ischarge plough
! 500
! 1000
> 1000
11.8
Design
Length Factor C
L
Working Conditions
Factor k
f
Additional Power Values
L (m ) 3 4 5 6 8 10 12.5 16 20
C
L
667 625 555 526 454 417 370 323 286
L (m ) 25 32 40 50 63 80 90 100 150
C
L
250 222 192 167 145 119 109 103 77
L (m ) 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
C
L
63 53 47 41 37 33 31 28 26
L (m ) 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000
C
L
23 20 18 17 12 9
W orking C onditions
Favourable, good alignm ent, slow speed
U nfavourable, dusty, low tem perature, overloading,
high speed
N orm al (Standard C onditions)
Extrem ely low tem perature
k
f
1.17
1
0.87 - 0.74
0.57
Scraper Type
sim ple, norm al contact 0.3
*
B
*
v
1.5
*
B
*
v
1.8
*
B
*
v
heavy contact
m ultifunctional fac scraper
0.16
*
v
*
l
f
beyond loading point
1.5
*
B
*
v
B ulk density ! 1.2
A ngle = 30 - 45
P (kW )
0.8
*
v
1.5
*
v
2.3
*
v
B ( m ) B elt w idth
l
f
( m ) Length of m aterial betw een skirtboard
L (m ) C onveying Length
Belt Type
N om inal B reaking Strength
N um ber of Plies
Friction Value Factor c
R
11.9
Design
This form ula is to enable calculation of belt breaking strengthand applies to
installations w ith a single pulley head drive, an angle of w rap = 200, a safe-
ty factor S = 8 to 10. B y using a dual pulley head drive or a head and tail drive
a low er strength belt type can result.
The nominal Breaking Strength k
N
is obtained by rounding up to the next
highest belt type.
The num ber of plies or thickness of carcase depends m ainly on the belt
w idth, m aterial characteristics (bulk density, lum p size) and conditions such
as transitions, height of m aterial fall, installation path, troughing etc.
c
R
P
T
k =
*
( N /m m )
c
v
v
98 74 59 45 37 30 25 21 18 16 15 14
69 52 41 32 26 21 17 15 13 12 10 9
62 46 37 28 23 18 15 13 12 10 9 8
57 43 34 26 21 17 14 12 11 9 8 8
53 40 32 25 20 16 13 11 10 9 8 7
D U N LO P B elt Type
D U N LO FLEX 2 ply overlap 100%
1 ply overlap 50%
1.00
0.50
TR IO FLEX 3 ply overlap 100%
2 ply overlap 67%
1.00
0.67
FER R O FLEX Zig-Zag Splice Joint 0.90
D U N LO PLA ST Finger Splice Joint 0.90
Steel C ord B elts Splice 1 and 2 step
3 step
4 step
Various M echanical Joints: R efer to M anufacturer
1.00
0.95
0.90
SU PER FO R T N um ber of plies 1
2
3
4
5
6
0.70
0.50
0.67
0.75
0.80
0.83
Splice Type Ply R ating Factor c
v
Breaking Strength Loss
at J oint Factor C
v
B reaking Strength
0.15
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.40
bare, w et
rubber lagged, w et
and dirty
bare, dry,
lagged, w et
rubber lagged, dry
Friction
Value
300 400 500 650 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200
D rive
Pulley
Surface
11.10
Design
The pulley diam eter for a conveyor belt depends upon the belt construction
(belt type, carcase m aterial and thickness of carcase), the duty and the
method of splicing. O ne can differentiate betw een 3 pulley groups depen-
ding on pulley location and angle of w rap .
To determ ine the pulley diam eter first ascertain the diam eter of the drive
pulleyw ith m axim um tension.
The calculated pulley diam eter is rounded up to the next higher standard dia-
m eter or if w orking conditions are favourable m ay be rounded dow n.
Pulley Diameters
Value C
Tr
Standard Pulley Diameter
(mm)
G R O U P A PPLIC A TIO N
A Pulleys in the areas of high belt stress. D rive Pulleys
B Pulleys in areas of low belt stress. Tail Pulleys
C Pulleys w ith an angle of w rap ! 90,D eflection or snub Pulleys
D
Tr
= C
Tr *
d ( m m )
d ( m m ) Thickness of carcase (see A ppendix C )
C
Tr
( - ) Value for w arp m aterial of carcase i.e. B elt type.
C
Tr
M aterial of C arcase in W arp or B elt Type
90 Polyam ide (P)
80 D U N LO FLEX 2 ply B elt
95 TR IO FLEX 3 ply B elt
108 SU PER FO R T M ultiply B elt (EP)
138 FER R O FLEX Steel W eave Type
145 SILVER C O R D Steel C ord B elt
100 D U N LO PLA ST M onoply B elt
Tail Pulley
Snub Pulley B end Pulley Snub Pulley
D rive Pulley
Tension Pulley
100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500
630 800 1000 1250 1400 1600 1800 2000
11.11
Design
O nce the diam eter of the largest pulley has been determ ined to a standard
size the diam eter for pulley groups A , B , C can be obtained from the follow ing
table.
The diam eters show n in the above table apply to belts operating at 60% -
100% of allow able tension.
W hen the rated tension of the belt is not fully utilized, it is perm issible to
reduce pulley diam eter to 1 to 2 sizes sm aller.
For pulley diameters of the DUNLOPbelt types: see Appendix K.
Pulley Revolution
Pulley Loading
Pulley D iam eter O f Pulley G roups (m m )
D iam eter
D
Tr
(m m ) A B C
100 100 - -
125 125 100 -
160 160 125 100
200 200 160 125
250 250 200 160
315 315 250 200
400 400 315 250
500 500 400 315
630 630 500 400
800 800 630 500
1000 1000 800 630
1250 1250 1000 800
1400 1400 1250 1000
1600 1600 1250 1000
1800 1800 1400 1250
2000 2000 1600 1250
T
m ax *
S
k
A
=
*
100 ( % )
B
*
k
N
T
m ax
( N ) M ax. belt tension
S ( - ) B elt safety factor w hen running
B ( m m ) B elt W idth
k
N
( N /m m ) N om inal breaking strength of belt
D egree of U tilization Pulley D iam eter
k
A
> 0.6 1 D iam eters as table
k
A
> 0.3 0.6 G roup A , B and C one size sm aller
k
A
< 0.3 G roup A and B 2 sizes sm aller
G roup C one size sm aller
v
*
60
n
T
= ( T/m in )
*
D
T
A 1
+ T
A 2
F
T
= ( kg )
9.81
Utilisation Percentage
11.12
Design
W ith rubber lagged drive pulleys the average surface pressure lim it is approxi-
m ately 70 N /cm
2
. This lim it is only reached on heavy drives and relatively
sm all pulley diam eters.
The transm ission capability p
is not to be confused w ith surface pressure!

The surface pressure is sum m ary calculated, the belt bending stresses being
ignored. W ith high belt stresses the pulley diam eter becom es too large
because of the low values for p
.
p
= 1600 - 2000 N /m m
2
above ground
p
= 3000 - 3500 N /m m
2
under ground
This form ula is no longer used to determ ine the pulley diam eter.
The distance betw een a term inal pulley and the adjacent fully troughed idler
set at either the head or tail end of a conveyor is know as the transition dis-
tance. In this distance the belt changes from a fully troughed to a flat profile
or vice versa respectively. The belt stretches additionally at its edge zone and
buckling in the m iddle of the belt is also possible.
To relieve the belt and edge stresses, the pulley m ay be raised slightly to the
value h (m m ) (see Page 11.13).
The necessary transition length for tension distribution w ith or w ithout pulley
elevation w hen designing can be estim ated or taken from the table.
Average Surface Pressure
Transmission Capability
Torque at Start-Up
Troughing Transition
Elevation of Pulley
T
A 1
+ T
A 2
p
T
= ( N /cm
2
)
D
*
B
360 * F
U
p
= ( N /m m
2
)
*
D
*
*
B
F
A *
D
M
A
= ( N m )
2
*
1000
D ( m m ) Pulley diam eter
B ( m m ) B elt w idth
F
A
( N ) Peripheral force at start-up
( ) A ngle of w rap
v ( m /s ) Speed
F
U
( N ) Peripheral force w hen running
L
M
L
red
l
h
S
L
1
11.13
Design
The pulley lift should not exceed the value h (m m ) in order not to get a ski
jum peffect. Lift-off from the centre roller is not desirable as this w ould
have an adverse effect on belt tracking.
Values apply to 3 roll idler sets.
1) R educed lengths L
red
apply to the raised pulley w ith the value h (m m )
according to the table.
Pulley R ise
R educed Transition D istance
Trough Transition Values
Pulley Lift h (m m )
L
M
= x
*
s
*
sin ( m m )
s
2
h =
*
sin ( m m )
B
L
red
= x
*
(s
*
sin - h) ( m m )
L
M
( m m ) N orm al transition length
L
red
( m m ) R educed transition length w ith raised pulley
l ( m m ) Length of centre carrying roller (see page 11.3)
s ( m m ) Portion of belt in contact w ith side idler roller, s = 0.5 * (B -l)
x ( - ) Factor for carcase x = 8 for Textile belts
x = 16 for ST. belts
( ) Troughing angle
h ( m m ) Pulley lift
Troughing A ngle
Textile belts
L
M
(m m ) L
red
1)
(m m )
ST Belts
L
red
1)
(m m )
Troughing 20 30 30 40 45 30 45
B elt W idth
(m m )
500
650
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
2200
410
550
665
850
1000
1190
1370
1550
1710
1920
600
800
970
1240
1470
1740
2000
2260
2500
2800
680
860
1020
1200
1380
1550
1720
1900
870
1100
1310
1540
1770
1990
2200
2450
950
1210
1440
1700
1950
2200
2430
2700
1350
1710
2040
2400
2750
3100
3432
3800
1900
2420
2870
3380
3890
4390
4860
5390
B elt W idth
(m m )
37
48
56
68
78
89
98
112
47
62
72
87
100
114
126
143
52
68
80
96
110
125
138
158
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
2200
Troughing A ngle
30 40 45
In the transition from inclined to horizontal, the belt edge zone is subjected to
additional stretch. In order not to exceed certain lim its, as a rule 0.8% addi-
tional stretch, the transition radius R
e
has to be dim ensioned accordingly.
M inim um radii for 3 roll carrying idlers.
11.14
Design
Convex Vertical Curve
Values of R adius R
e
(m )
l
S
R
e
L
l
0
C arrying side
R eturn side
R
e
= x
*
s
*
sin ( m )
s ( m m ) Portion of belt in contact w ith side idler roller
x ( - ) Factor for carcase
x = 125 for textile belts
x = 400 for steel cord belts
L =
*
*
R
e
/ 180 ( m )
z = / (Pieces)
l
o
= L / z ( m )
( ) D eviation per idler
= approx 2 for 30 troughing
= approx 3 for 20 troughing
( ) G radient of installation
C onvex R adius
C urve Length
N um ber of Idlers
in C urve
Idler Pitch
Textile belts
20 30 45
500
650
800
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
2200
6.5
8.5
10.5
13.0
16.0
18.5
21.0
24.0
26.5
30.0
9.3
12.5
15.0
19.5
23.0
27.0
31.0
35.0
39.0
44.0
13.5
17.5
21.0
27.0
32.0
38.0
44.0
50.0
55.0
62.0
30.0
40.0
48.5
62.0
74.5
87.0
100.0
113.0
125.0
140.0
-
-
68.5
88.0
104.0
123.0
141.0
160.0
177.0
198.0
ST Belts
30 45
Belt Width
(m m )
11.15
Design
W ith a concave vertical curve, the belt path goes from horizontal to incline.
A t start-up or load change there m ay be a risk of the belt lifting off the car-
rying idlers in this region. This can lead to a reduction in pre-tension. If due
to special circum stances a brief lift-off can be tolerated then the lifting belt
can be restrained by rollers m ounted above the troughing idlers. In any event
action m ust be taken to ensure that the belt does not lose load m aterial.
W ith a concave vertical curve,buckling of the belt edges and overstress of
the m iddle of the belt can occur. (To check calculation see A ppendix I.5.)
Concave Vertical Curve
Additional Stretch-buckling
R
a
L
x
T
x
x
a
y
a
T
x
( N ) Tension at start of curve w hen fully loaded
m
G
( kg/m ) B elt w eight
( ) G radient angle, up to 18 use 18, cos 1
T
x
R
a
= ( m )
m
G *
cos
*
g
x
a
= R
a *
tan horizontal distance
y
a
= 0.5
*
R
a *
tan
2
vertical distance
C oncave R adius
C o-ordinates of
C urve
11.16
Design
O ne m ethod of solving belt cleaning problems on the return side runis the
use of belt turnover. This m ethod is em ployed in inaccessible areas such as
conveyor bridges and tunnels. To avoid excessive strain in the edge region
of the belt, the turnover m ust be a certain m inim um length, depending on the
m ethod of turnover, belt type and belt w idth.
W ith textile belts up to a w idth of 1200 m m
and a thickness of 10 m m , the belt m ay be
turned over unguided and w ithout support.
A t the entry and exit points of the turnover
lengths, the belt is fed through a pair of rol-
lers.
W ith textile and steel cord belts up to 1600
m m w ide to support the belt in the m iddle of
the turnover length, a pair of vertical rollers is
used. A t the entry and exit points the belt is
fed through a pair of horizontal rollers.
W ith textile and steel cord belts up to 2200
m m w ide. W ith this turnover the belt is fed
over support rollers w hich run on a length-
w ise axis.
For sm ooth running of the belt through the turnover stretch, a minimum belt
tension is necessary.
If T
x
is > than T
2
or T
3
then belt tensions have to be corrected.
Belt Turnover
U n-guided Turnover
G uided Turnover
Supported Turnover
Turnover Lengths
Values for Turnover Lengths
L
W
(m )
M in. B elt Tension at Turnover
L
w *
m
G *
g
m in. T
x
= ( N )
8
*
h
L
w
( m ) Length of Turnover Stretch
h ( % ) D egree of sag 1.5% is recom m ended (h = 0.015)
m
G
( kg/m ) Load due to conveyor belt
B ( m ) B elt W idth
L
w
L
w
= 1.36
*
B
*
71 = 11.5
*
B ( m )
L
w
= 1.55
*
B
*
245 = 24
*
B ( m )
M ethod of guiding belt in
Turnover Lengths
B elt Type
free or w ith guided w ith a
support rollers m iddle roller
EP belts 12
*
B 13
*
B
D U N LO PLA ST 16
*
B 19
*
B
FER R O FLEX 17
*
B 20
*
B
ST. B ELTS 18
*
B 22
*
B
for EP belts
for ST belts
11.17
Design
W ithin lim its, belts are able to negotiate horizontal curves. To do this the car-
rying idlers on the inside of the curve are slightly raised by the angle
R
accor-
ding to radius and belt tension by approxim ately 5-15.
The exact position has to be determ ined by adjustm ent.
For design purposes the follow ing radii m ay be selected being the smaller
permissible radii R
H
(m).
The values R
H
apply to a troughing angle of 30
Horizontal Curve
Value of C urve R adius
R
H
R
H
R
l
Inside of C urve
l
R
H
= k
*
[ l + B
*
( 1 - )
*
cos ] ( m )
B
l ( m m ) Length of m iddle carrying roller (see Page 11.3)
( ) Troughing angle
R
( ) Lifting of the carrying rollers (ca. 5 to 15)
k ( - ) Factor (consider belt type and duty)
for EP belts k = 71
D U N LO PLA ST k = 150
FER R O FLEX k = 225
ST belts k = 245
B elt w idth
(m m ) 300 400 500 650 800 1000 1200 1400
EP belts 20 26 33 42 52 65 72 91
D U N LO PLA ST 42 56 69 89 110 137 165 192
FER R O FLEX - - - 134 165 206 248 289
ST belts - - - 146 180 224 270 314
B elt w idth
(m m ) 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800
EP belts 104 117 130 142 156 169 182
D U N LO PLA ST 220 247 275 - - - -
FER R O FLEX 329 370 412 452 - - -
ST belts 359 404 449 493 - - -
12.1
Basis of calculations
A fter the design of the installation and the m ain data has been determ ined an
exact calculation can be undertaken. Established installation com ponents
can be checked and dim ensioned. The belt selection can be undertaken
according to forces that have been established and other relevant
criteria.
The resistances to m otion w ithin a belt installation m ay be categorised thus:
- Main resistance
- Secondary resistance
- Slope resistance
- Special resistances
Resistance due to moving the mass of idlers, belt and m aterial on the car-
rying and return runs. R unning resistance of idlers (bearing and seal fric-
tion). Resistance due to impressions m ade in the belt by idlers and the
flexing of the belt.
W ith gradients ! 18 C os = 1.
R esistance occurring m ainly in the loading area such as the acceleration of
the m aterial at the loading point. R esistance due to the friction on the side
w alls of the chute, resistance due to belt flexing on pulleys, pulley bearing
resistance.
W ith norm al installations w ith one loading point, the secondary resistance
can be calculated by using the factor C as part of the m ain resistance.
Factor C depends on the conveying length and can be taken from the table
on Page 12.3.
If the secondary resistance relative to the total resistance is high as for
instance w ith conveyors less than approxim ately 80 m long w ith several
loading points, a separate calculation is necessary.
R esistance from loadand elevation.
The special resistances are due to installation com ponents such as:
the forw ard tilt of outer idler rollers to im prove tracking
m aterial deflection ploughs and belt cleaners, continuous skirtboards
trippers (throw -off carriages)
bunker drag out belts
The resistances to m otion are relatively sim ple to calculate. Inform ation not
available such as pulley diam eters etc. can be estim ated for initial calculation
form ulae or taken from the appropriate table.
Form ulae for calculation: see A ppendix E.
Resistance to Motion F
H
Main Resistance F
H
Secondary Resistance F
N
N ote
Slope Resistance F
St
Special Resistances F
S
F
H
= f
*
L
*
g
*
[ m
R
+ ( 2
*
m
G
+ m
L
)
*
cos ] ( N )
F
N
= ( C - 1 )
*
F
H
( N )
F
St
= H
*
g
*
m
L
( N )
12.2
Peripheral force steady state working
The sum of the resistances to m otion is equal to the peripheral force FU at
the drive pulley (or shared over several drive pulleys).
For installations w ith one loading point, as a rule the follow ing sum m ation
applies:
Peripheral Force F
U
W orking C onditions
Sum m ation
H erringbone B elt in O peration
F
U
= F
H
+ F
N
+ F
St
+ F
S
( N )
F
U
= C
*
f
*
L
*
g
*
[m
R
+ (2
*
m
G
+ m
L
)
*
cos ] + H
*
g
*
m
L
+ F
S
( N )
C ( - ) Length factor
f ( - ) A rtificial friction factor
L ( m ) C onveyor length
g ( m /s
2
) A cceleration due to gravity
m
R
( kg/m ) M ass of the rotating carrying and return idlers
m
G
( kg/m ) M ass of the belt
m
L
( kg/m ) M ass of the load
( ) G radient of the installation w ith ! 18 cos = 1
H ( m ) C onveying height
H > 0 inclined conveying
H < 0 declined conveying
F
S
( N ) Sum of the special resistances. For separate calculations see A ppendix.
12.3
This adjustm ent factor m akes allow ance for secondary resistances (See
page 12.1). The influence of Factor C w ill decrease the greater the conveyor
length. For installations less than a conveying length of approxim ately 80m or
having several loading points see appendix D .
Factor C
Frderlnge L in m
B
e
i
w
e
r
t

C
L (m ) 3 4 5 6 8 10 13 16 20
C 9.0 7.6 6.6 5.9 5.1 4.5 4.0 3.6 3.0
L (m ) 25 32 40 50 63 80 90 100 120
C 2.9 2.6 2.4 2.2 2.0 1.92 1.86 1.78 1.70
L (m ) 140 160 180 200 250 300 350 400 450
C 1.63 1.56 1.50 1.45 1.38 1.31 1.27 1.25 1.20
L (m ) 500 550 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000
C 1.20 1.18 1.17 1.14 1.12 1.10 1.09 1.06 1.00
C
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t

C
C onveying Length in m m
12.4
The friction factor f is used for the calculations of the resistances to m otion. It
provides an estim ate of the resistance to rotation of the idlers, the belt resi-
stance (flexing and idler im pressions) and m aterial im pression resistance.
Values for the factor f are dependent upon the working conditions and con-
struction characteristics of the installation.
The above table values are relevant for v = 5 m /s and a tem perature of
+ 20C .
U nder certain circum stances the follow ing adjustm ents are possible or neces-
sary:
a) W ith other speeds the follow ing applies:
b) W ith othertemperatures the follow ing applies:
For central European regions and norm al w orking conditions the value of
f = 0.020 - 0.021 w ould be used.
In extrem e tem peratures such as those in tropical regions a value for
f = 0.017 w ould apply.
In extrem ely low tem peratures a value for f up to 0.035 w ould be used.
Friction Factor f
A djustm ents
Horizontal, inclined or slightly declined
installations - Motor driven
Favourable w orking conditions,
easily rotating idlers, m aterial
0.017
w ith low internal friction
and good tracking, good m aintenance
N orm al installation, norm al m aterial 0.020
U nfavourable conditions,
low tem perature, m aterial 0.023 - 0.027
w ith high internal friction,
subject to overload, poor m aintenance
Installations with steep declines 0.012 - 0.016
creating regenerative conditions
W ith v < > 5 m /s f = c
*
f
5m /s
v (m /s) 2 3 4 5 6
Factor c 0.80 0.85 0.90 1.00 1.10
W ith T < 20C f = c
*
f
20C
T (C ) + 20 0 -10 -20 -30
Factor c 1.00 1.07 1.17 1.28 1.47
12.5
The m ass of rotating parts m
R
(kg/m ) is calculated from the w eight of the
rotating idler rollers on the carrying and return runs.
For the m asses m
R O
and m
R u
(kg). A pplicable to standard rollers diam eters
and belt w idths 300 m m to 2200 m m . See table in the A ppendix.
If this inform ation is not available roller pitch values as per Page 11.3 m ay be
used.
Standard idler roller diameters (mm) of flat or troughed rollers according to
D IN 15107 are:
The idlers and discs m ay vary from m anufacturer to m anufacturer. For loca-
tion of disc rollers see A ppendix M .1.
The m ass of the belt m
G
is determ ined from the w eights of the various belt
types.
For the belt w eights m
G
(kg/m 2) of the D U N LO P-belt types see A ppendix C .
Mass of Rotating Parts m
R
W eight of rollers per m
M ass of rollers
m
R o
et m
R u
R oller Pitch
Idler R oller D iam eter
Mass of Belt m
G
B elt w eight per m
m
R o
m
R u
m
R
= + ( kg/m )
l
o
l
u
m
R o
( kg ) M ass of one set of carrying idler rollers
m
R u
( kg ) M ass of one set of return idler rollers
l
o
( m ) Pitch of carrying idlers
l
u
( m ) Pitch of return idlers
(51) 63.5 88.9 108 133 159 193.7 219.1
Tube dia. m m . 51 57 63.5 88.9 108 133
D isc rollers 120 133 150 180 180 215
dia. m m . 215 250
m
G
= m
G *
B ( kg/m )
m
G
( kg/m
2
) B elt w eight per m
2
12.6
The load m
L
is derived from the cross sectional area of the bulk load stream
Q
m
alternatively w ith piece loads, from the w eight of one piece.
Peripheral force F
A
in a non-steady state running condition
A t the breakaway and start-upof a loaded installation, the inertial resistan-
ces to m otion of the m asses to be m oved, have to be overcom e. The belt
stresses during acceleration have to be kept to a m inim um . The initial pulley
peripheral force at start-up m ust not exceed a certain value.
The m axim um peripheral force F
A
should not be greater than approx (1.3 to
1.5)
*
F
u
, the steady state running peripheral force.
In order to accelerate the m asses on the conveying length, a force equiva-
lent to a m inim um of 20% of the m otional resistances should be available.
The peripheral force F
A
should be applied to the belt over such a period of
tim e that the installation is m aintained at alm ost a steady state and so acce-
lerates w ith m inim um additional dynamic forces.
A t start-up w ith acceleration aA and peripheral for F
A
one should seek to
ascertain the friction cut-off value betw een m aterial and belt ( perhaps also
w hen braking)
Mass of the Load m
L
M aterial w eight per m
Peripheral Force F
A
at Start-Up
R ecom m endations
Friction cut-off
M aterial B elt
Q
m
m
L
= ( kg/m )
3.6
*
v
m
st
m
L
= ( kg/m )
l
st
+ a
st
Q
m
( t/h ) Loadstream m ass
m
st
( kg ) W eight of each piece
l
st
( m ) Length of each piece
a
st
( m ) Spacing of pieces
a
A
! (
1 *
cos
m ax
- sin
m ax
)
*
g ( m /s
2
)
( ) angle of slope of the installation
> 0 inclined conveyors
< 0 declined conveyors
1
( - ) friction value belt/m aterial
1
= 0.5 0.7
a
A
( m /s
2
) acceleration (calculationl, see Page 12.7)
For bulk loads
For unit loads
12.7
U
increases at start-up. To take account of the start-up
resistances a factor k
A
is applied resulting in peripheral force F
A
. The value of
k
A
is dependent on the drive unit m otor/coupling used.
R igid couplings are used on sm all installations up to approx. 30kw m otor
pow er and squirrel cage type. The peripheral force F
A
is derived from the
installed m otor pow er.
W ith this type of coupling the start-up torque of the m otor is reduced.
The installed m otor pow er m ay be substantially higher than is necessary
therefore F
A
should be less than or equal to F
U *
2.5.
W ith hydraulic couplings the start-up torque can be regulated and lim ited to
the desired start-up factor and by doing this, depending on the size of the
installation, a near steady state running condition can be achieved.
A t start-up and braking the acceleration and deceleration forces of the m ass
being m oved have to be considered. If the drive elem ents (m otor, coupling,
gears) and the non-driven pulley resistances are higher than the rem aining
resistances, this has to be taken into account.
If the acceleration tim e t
A
is greater than 10 s, in the case of squirrel cage
m otors a start-up coupling is necessary because of therm al effects.
Start-Up Factor k
A
R igid C ouplings
Flexible C oupling
H ydraulic C oupling
Acceleration a
A
P
N *
*
1000
F
A
= k
A *
( N )
v
P
N
( kW ) installed m otor pow er
( - ) degree of drive efficiency
v ( m /s ) speed
k
A
( - ) start-up factor
K
A
= 2.0 to 2.2
if F
A
> F
U
* 2.5 then F
A
should = 2.5 * F
U
, (cut-off torque)
P
N
F
A
= k
A *
F
U *
( N )
P
M
F
A
= k
A *
F
U
( N )
k
A
( - ) start-up factor,
k
A
= 1.2 to 1.5
regulated by the volum e of oil in the w orking circuit.
F
A
- F
U
a
A
= ( m /s
2
)
L
*
( m
R ed
+ 2
*
m
G
+ m
L
) + m
A red
+ m
red
m
R ed
( kg/m ) R educed m ass of idlers m
R ed
" 0.9
*
m
R
m
A red
( kg/m ) R educed m ass of drive elem ents
m
red
( kg/m ) R educed m ass of non-driven elem ents (bend pulleys etc)
t
A
= v / a
A
( s )
s
A
= v
*
t
A
/ 2 ( m )
A cceleration tim e
A cceleration D istance
P
M
( kW ) required m otor pow er
k
A
( - ) start-up factor,
k
A
= 1.2 to 1.6
12.8
B
on braking has to be determ ined for the m ost
adverse circum stances. The braking time t
B
has to take care of safety requi-
rem ents (em ergency stop) or the braking distance s
B
because of the possi-
bility of continuing flow due to over-run of the conveyor.
The brake has to take account of the braking duty and delay.
Peripheral Force F
B
on Braking
Peripheral Force F
B
a
B
= v / t
B
( m /s
2
)
s
B
= v
*
t
B
/ 2 ( m )
F
B
= a
B *
L
*
( m
R ed
+ 2
*
m
G
+ m
L
) + F
U
+ F
T
( N )
F
T
( N ) If a great proportion arises from the non-braked elem ents these forces m ust be
added.
F
T
= a
B *
m
red
( N )
m
red
( kg ) R educed m asses of the non-braked elem ents or pulleys
B raking torque of the M otor
F
B *
B
M
V
= ( N m )
i
M
B r
= M
M
+ M
V
( N m )
n ( T/m in ) M otor revolutions
B
( - ) Friction value of brake disc
F
B
( N ) Peripheral force on braking
i ( - ) Transm ission ratio
F
U *
v
P
T
= ( kW )
1000
P
M
= P
T
/ ( kW ) F
U
> 0
P
M
= P
T *
( kW ) F
U
< 0
P
N
( kW ) selected m otor pow er
D elay
O verun D istance
D elay M om ent
B raking Torque of the M otor
Drive Motor at Pulley
Required Motor Power
Motor Power on
Braked Installation
Installed Motor Power
P
N
M
M
= 975
*
g
*
( N m )
n
12.9
A fter the peripheral force F
U
has been ascertained and hence the drive pow er
P
T
requirem ent, the drive system, position and num ber of m otors can be
established.
The single pulley head drive is the m ost com m on all drive system s. W ith hori-
zontal and inclined conveyors these give the m ost favourable belt stresses
and w ith declined conveyors w ith gradients of 1 to 2 providing the peripher-
al force rem ains positive.
The preferred location of the drive on a declined conveyor is at the tail end.
The drive becom es a generator and acts as a brake.
W hen a relatively high proportion of m otional resistance is due to the return
run, this drive system provides the m ost favourable belt stress condition.
D egree of Efficiency
(Values)
N om inal Pow er P
N
(kW )
Drive System
Single Pulley H ead D rive
Tail D rive
H ead and Tail D rive
Types of D rive
W orm gear drive 0.7 - 0.8
Toothed chain drive 0.9 - 0.95
V-R ope drive 0.95
Pulley m otor 0.96
N orm al coupled drive 0.94
G eared and hydraulic coupling 0.90
H ydraulic m otor 0.86
B raked installations 0.95 - 1.0
Selected according to D IN 42973
1.5 2.2 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5
22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 132
160 200 250 315 400 500 630
T
1
T
2
F
U
P
1
P
2
F
U 1
F
U 2 F
u
F
o
T
1
T
2
F
U B
T
3
T
4
The m ost favourable distribution of the total pow er is as follow s:
W ith identical drives i.e. P
1
= P
2
, T
4
m ay be less than T
m in
and the pretension
has to be increased accordingly.
W ith high drive pow ers it is often necessary to distribute the available perip-
heral force over tw o pulleys. The angle of w rap can thus be increased to
approx 420.
The most favourable drive distributionis as follow s:
A s a rule the friction coefficient is taken to be the sam e for both pulleys.
12.10
Head and Tail Drive
Dual Pulley Head Drive
P
T
= P
1
+ P
2
( kW )
P
1
F
o
(Prim ary force)
" = x
P
2
F
u
(Secondary force)
P
2
= P
T
/ ( x + 1 ) ( kW )
F
U 2
= F
U
/ ( x + 1 ) ( N )
F
U 1
= F
U
- F
U 2
( N )
P
T
= P
1
+ P
2
( kW )
P
1
F
U 1
e
1
- 1 Value for
" " e
2
= x factor x
P
2
F
U 2
e
2
- 1 see Table
P
2
= P
T
/ ( x + 1 ) ( kW )
F
U 2
= F
U
/ ( x + 1 )
F
U 1
= F
U
- F
U 2
( N )
Total Pow er
D istribution
M otor 2
Peripheral force Pulley 2
Total Pow er
D istribution
M otor 2
Pulley 1
P
1
F
U 1
Pulley 2
P
2
F
U 2
T
2
T
1
12.11
In practice the m ost favourable distribution of pow er does not often occur
because the norm is to use equal drive units. A s a result of this the drive pul-
leys are not equally utilized. With unequal distribution of the total power,
the drive pow ers for individual pulleys are thus:
Factor x for various
drive conditions
P
T
= P
1
+ P
2
( kW )
P
1
F
U 1
" = x
P
2
F
U 2
F
U 2
= F
U
/ ( x + 1 ) ( N )
F
U 1
= F
U
- F
U 2
( N )
Total Pow er
D istribution
Pulley 2 Angle of Wrap
1
Pulley 1
=0.25 160 170 180 190 200 210
160 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00
170 1.90 2.10 2.30 2.48 2.67 2.86
180 1.83 2.02 2.20 2.38 2.57 2.75
2
190 1.77 1.95 2.12 2.30 2.48 2.65
200 1.71 1.89 2.06 2.23 2.40 2.57
210 1.67 1.83 2.00 2.17 2.33 2.50
=0.3 160 170 180 190 200 210
160 2.31 2.53 2.76 3.00 3.26 3.53
170 2.22 2.43 2.66 2.89 3.14 3.40
180 2.15 2.35 2.57 2.79 3.03 3.28
2
190 2.08 2.28 2.48 2.70 2.93 3.18
200 2.02 2.21 2.41 2.62 2.85 3.08
210 1.97 2.15 2.35 2.55 2.77 3.00
=0.35 160 170 180 190 200 210
160 2.66 2.92 3.20 3.51 3.84 4.18
170 2.56 2.82 3.10 3.39 3.70 4.03
180 2.48 2.74 3.00 3.29 3.59 3.91
2
190 2.41 2.66 2.92 3.19 3.48 3.80
200 2.35 2.58 2.84 3.11 3.39 3.70
210 2.29 2.52 2.77 3.03 3.31 3.61
12.12
B efore the belt tensions are determ ined it necessary to check w hether the
peripheral force of Pulley 1 or peripheral force of Pulley 2 are fully utilized.
This drive system is treated in the sam e w ay as a dual pulley head drive
system .
The peripheral forces can be ascertained as follow s:
The calculation of belt stresses is as described under D ual Pulley H ead D rive.
B esides the drive system s described further drive distributions and arrange-
m ents are possible. These are treated in a sim ilar fashion.
Dual Pulley Head and
Tail Drive
Other Drive Systems
D istribution U tilization of B elt stresses
proportion peripheral force
P
1
/P
2
> x Pulley 1 full T
2
= F
U 1 *
c
12
- F
U 2
utilization T
1
= T
2
+ F
U
P
1
/P
2
! x Pulley 2 full T
2
= F
U 2 *
c
22
utilization T
1
= T
2
+ F
U
1 1
c
12
= c
22
=
e
1
- 1 e
2
- 1
D rive Factor Pulley 1 D rive Factor Pulley 2
Pulley 3
Pulley 1
Pulley 2
F
U 3
P
3
F
U 1
P
1
F
U 2
P
2
P
T
= P
1
+ P
2
+ P
3
( kW )
F
U
= F
U 1
+ F
U 2
+ F
U 3
( N )
P
1
+ P
2
F
U 1
+ F
U 2
" " x
P
3
F
U 3
F
U 3
= F
U
/ ( x + 1 ) ( N )
F
U 1
+ F
U 2
= F
U
- F
U 3
= F
k
( N )
P
1
F
U 1
" = w
P
2
F
U 2
F
U 2
= F
k
/ ( w + 1 ) ( N )
F
U 1
= F
k
- F
U 2
( N )
Total Pow er
Peripheral Forces
D istribution H ead and Tail
Peripheral for Pulley 3
Peripheral force at H ead
D istribution Pulley 1 and 2
Peripheral Force Pulley 2
Peripheral Force Pulley 1
The distribution of peripheral forces
at start-up and determ ination of belt
stresses follow s analogously.
12.13
From the calculated peripheral forces F
U
and F
A
m axim um belt tensions T
1
and T
2.
T
1A
and T
2A
can be ascertained for the steady state and non-steady
state running conditions respectively.
A t start-up of the installation the friction value increases slightly for a short
period of tim e, therefore calculate thus.
B elt tensions thus calculated are not yet the belt tensions that w ill actually
occur w hen w orking. They m ay be used for estim ating purposes on sm all
installations. For exact and ongoing calculations the follow ing corrections are
necessary.
Depending on the type of take-up system, a correction of the belt ten-
sion is necessary.
W ith a fixed take-up the tension pulley is at a fixed location after tensioning.
The centre to centre distance does not change. D epending on changing
loads, the belt stretches and contracts w ithin its elastic lim its. The total elon-
gation is constant. For all w orking condition,the sum of the belt tensions
has to be constant.
The pre-tension has to be calculated and set so as to take account of the non-
steady state running conditions such as start-up and braking. The location of
the take-up pulley does not m atter. It can be at the discharge end, the tail end
or the m iddle of the conveyor installation.
Belt Tension
Belt Tension Correction
1. Correction with fixed
take-up
Location of take-up Pulley
T
1
= F
U *
c
1
( N ) T
1A
= F
A *
c
1A
( N )
T
2
= F
U *
c
2
( N ) T
2A
= F
A *
c
2A
( N )
Steady State R unning N on-Steady State R unning
1 1
c
1
= 1+ c
2
=
e
- 1 e
- 1
D rive Factor tight side D rive Factor slack side
Friction value at start-up
A
" + 0.05
1 1
c
1A
= 1+ c
2A
=
e
- 1 e
- 1
D rive Factor tight side at D rive Factor slack side at
start-up start-up
T
W orking
= T
Start-U p
= C onstant
D rive
T
1
T
2
T
3
T
4 F
v
Return
12.14
The belt tensions on the bend pulleys are higher at rest than they are w hen
running.
B ecause the length of the belt does not alter, the take-up is constant.
The pre-tension has to cater for start-up therefore all belt tensions increase by
the difference betw een running and start-up conditions.
W ith a fixed take-up, all belt tensions w hen running are increased by the
correction value T.
W ith the m ovable take-up the belt length is not constant. W ith changes in
belt stress the take-up w eight adjusts to the various belt elongations/length
changes. The belt tensions at the take-up location are alw ays the sam e. The
take-up w eight has to be calculated to cater for the non-steady state running
conditions such as start-up and braking. The belt tensions at the take-up
location are alw ays higher than those necessary for the steady state running
condition.
The take-up w eight can be installed at the drive, the tail or at any location.
Stress D istribution
Take-up
C orrection value
for fixed take-up
1. Correction with
moveable take-up
Location of take-up w eight
T
4
T
3
T
2
T
1
T
M
Running
At Rest
T
M
= T
B
/ 4 ( N )
T = T
A
/ 4 ( N )
s
B
= s
A
( m m )
S
B
( m m ) Take-up w hen running
S
A
( m m ) Take-up at start-up
T
A
- T
B
T = ( N )
4
T
3
T
4
F
v
T
2
T
1
F
v
B elt tension at rest

A verage belt tension at start-up
12.15
The size of the take-up w eight depends on the location of the take-up
system .
B ecause the tension w eight is effective both at rest and during running, all
belt tensions increase by the correction value T.
The control of minimum belt tension. T
min
is necessary in order that the
belt sag betw een carrying idlers at the loading point does not exceed a cer-
tain value.
If the loading T
4
< T
m in
the belt w ould sag betw een the idlers. To avoid this,
all belt tensions have to be increased by the correction value T.
Stress D istribution
C orrection Value
2. Correction
C orrection Value
R unning A t rest
T
4
T
3
T
2
T
1
F
V
= T
3
+ T
4
or F
V
= 2
*
T
2
( N )
G
V
= F
V
/ g ( kg )
T = T
A 2
- T
2
( N )
T = T
m in
- T
4
( N )
( m
L
+ m
G
)
*
l
o *
g
T
m in
= ( N )
8
*
h
rel
h
rel
= h / l
o
Sag ratio
h
rel
= 0.005 to 0.015 for carrying side
h
rel
= 0.020 to 0.030 for return side
l
o
(m m ) D istance betw een the carrying idlers
h (m m ) B elt sag (see Page 11.2)
Take-up tension
Take-up w eight
Minimum belt tension
12.16
The tensions T
1
to T
4
are best determ ined according to the sequential calcula-
tion principle. This m ethod enables the tension to be ascertained at any given
point on the installation as w ell as under certain w orking conditions such as
start-up and braking.
The forces that affect the belt are determ ined according to their size and
direction in w hich they operate. Those are the secondary resistances w hich
arise at the loading point, friction resistances, the slope resistance and the
inertial resistances at start-up and braking.
The force diagram can be applied to the carrying side, return side as w ell as
to drive and return pulleys.
The point tensions T
1
to T
4
can be calculated from the condition F = 0.
Sequential Calculation
Force Distribution
Individual Resistances
FN
Fs
to
Fo
Fa
o
Fb
o
FU
Fs
tu
Fb
u
Fa
u
Fu
T4
T3
T1
T2
aB
aB
aA
aA
v
v
FU
T2
T1
FU
T
a
il
T4
T3
Tail drive
FU
T
a
il
C arrying side 0 = T1 - T4 - FN - Fo - Fsto - Fao
R eturn side 0 = T3 - T2 - Fu + Fstu - Fau
w ith H ead D rive 0 = T1 - FU - T2
w ith Tail D rive 0 = T4 + FU H eck - T3
M ain resistance F
H
= f
*
L
*
g
*
(m
R
+ 2
*
m
G *
m
L
)
Secondary resistance F
N
= ( C - 1 )
*
F
H
Friction resistance
C arrying side F
o
= f
*
L
*
g
*
(m
R o
+ m
G
+ m
L
)
R eturn side F
u
= f
*
L
*
g
*
(m
R u
+ m
G
)
Slope resistance
C arrying side F
sto
= H
*
g
*
(m
G
+ m
L
)
R eturn side F
stu
= H
*
g
*
m
G
Inertial resistance
C arrying side F
ao
= L
*
a
*
(m
R edo
+ m
G
+ m
L
)
R eturn side F
au
= L
*
a
*
(m
R edu
+ m
G
)
a ( m /s
2
) A cceleration a
A
or deceleration a
B
m
R edo
( kg/m ) R educed m ass of carrying idlers
m
R edu
( kg/m ) R educed m ass of return idlers
R educed m ass m
R ed
" 0.9
*
m
R
For other form ulae sym bols see Page 12.2.
The individual resistances are calculated as follow s:
12.17
D eterm ination of the point tensions (T
1
to T
4
and T
A 1
to T
A 4
w ith the help of
individual resistances (for peripheral force F
U
# 0. positive).
The tensions T
1
to T
4
and T
A 1
to T
A 4
m ust be increased by T, if the follo-
w ing conditions apply:
1. W ith fixed take-up if T
A
> T
2. W ith m ovable take-up if T
A 2
> T
2
3. W ith m inim um belt tension if T
m in
> T
4
For correction form ulae see Pages 12.13 -12.15.
To calculate braking forces the peripheral force F
B
on braking has to be deter-
m ined. The sequential calculation for non-steady state w orking then begins
w ith
The inertial m ass resistance F
bo
and F
b
u is determ ined w ith the deceleration
a
B
. The belt tension T
B 2
lies on the tight side of the drive pulley.
O therw ise the sequential calculation can be done along the sam e lines.
Single Pulley Head Drive
C orrection of belt tensions
Braking
T
4
T
3
T
1
T
2
F
N
F
U
T
2
= F
U *
c
2
T
A 2
= F
A *
c
2A
T
3
= T
2
+ F
u
- F
stu
T
A 3
= T
A 2
+ F
u
- F
stu
+ F
au
T
4
= T
3
T
A 4
= T
A 3
T
1
= T
4
+ F
N
+ F
o
+ F
sto
T
A 1
= T
A 4
+ F
N
+ F
o
+ F
sto
+ F
ao
B elt Tension (start-up) N on-steady state w orking
Control T
2
= T
1
- F
U
T
A 2
= T
A 1
- F
A
T
B 2
= F
B *
c
2A
12.18
Tensions T
1
to T
4
and T
A 1
to T
A 4
m ust be corrected as described under single
pulley head drive.
The tensions T
1
to T
4
and T
A 1
to T
A 4
m ust be corrected as described under
single pulley head drive.
Tail Drive
Tail Drive
(Braking)
T
2
T
1
T
3
T
4
F
N
F
U
T
2
T
1
T
3
T
4
F
N
F
U
T
2
= F
U *
c
2
T
A 2
= F
A *
c
2A
T
3
= T
2
+ F
u
+ F
o
+ F
sto
T
A 3
= T
A 2
+ F
N
+ F
o
+ F
sto
+ F
ao
T
4
= T
3
T
A 4
= T
A 3
T
1
= T
4
+ F
u
- F
stu
T
A 1
= T
A 4
+ F
u
- F
stu
+ F
au
B elt tensions steady state B elt tensions non-steady state
w orking w orking (start-up)
Control T
2
= T
1
- F
U
T
A 2
= T
A 1
- F
A
T
2
= F
U *
c
2
T
A 2
= F
A *
c
2A
T
3
= T
2
- F
u
- F
stu
T
A 3
= T
A 2
- F
u
- F
stu
+ F
au
T
4
= T
3
T
A 4
= T
A 3
T
1
= T
4
- F
N
- F
o
+ F
sto
T
A 1
= T
A 4
- F
N
- F
o
+ F
sto
+ F
ao
Control T
2
= T
1
- F
U
T
A 2
= T
A 1
- F
A
For F
U
# 0
For F
U
< 0
12.19
The tensions T
1
to T
4
and T
A 1
to T
A 4
The belt tension T
2
is dependent on the destribution of the start-up force i.e.
of the utilization of the peripherical force by drive pulley 1 or 2.
R efer to page 12.12.
The tensions T
1
to T
4
and T
A 1
to T
A 4
Head and Tail Drive
C orrection
Dual Pulley Head Drive
Belt Tension T
2
C orrection of B elt Tension
T
4
T
3
T
1
T
2
F
U 2
F
U 1
T
3
F
U 1
F
U 2
T
4
T
2
T
1
For F
U
# 0
For F
U
# 0
T
2
= F
U 1 *
c
2
T
A 2
= F
A 1 *
c
2A
T
3
= T
2
+ F
u
- F
stu
T
A 3
= T
A 2
+ F
u
- F
stu
+ F
au
T
4
= T
3
- F
U 2
T
A 4
= T
A 3
- F
A 2
T
1
= T
4
+ F
N
+ F
o
+ F
sto
T
A 1
= T
A 4
+ F
N
+ F
o
+ F
sto
+ F
ao
Control T
2
= T
1
- F
U
T
A 2
= T
A 1
- F
A
T
2
= refer to page 12.13 T
A 2
= refer to page 12.13
T
3
= T
2
+ F
u
- F
stu
T
A 3
= T
A 2
+ F
u
- F
stu
+ F
au
T
4
= T
3
- F
U 2
T
A 4
= T
A 3
- F
A 2
T
1
= T
4
+ F
N
+ F
o
+ F
sto
T
A 1
= T
A 4
+ F
N
+ F
o
+ F
sto
+ F
a
Control T
2
= T
1
- F
U
T
A 2
= T
A 1
- F
A
12.20
A belt conveyor can be divided into sections according to certain w orking and
topographical conditions w ith differing lengths and heights. The resistance to
m otion for these sections can be calculated as previously w ith loading point
and discharge point or other special resistances being apportioned to the
section w here the resistance occurs.
W ith varying conditions and changing loads on certain sections, greater or les-
ser resistance to m otion can occur, e.g. belt force w ith continuous loading.
To determ ine these points, the resistances have to be ascertained under
various w orking conditions such as load run-on and run-off conditions and
running unloaded.
A t the sam e tim e it can be established w hether the installation has to be
driven by or braked by the m otor.
To determ ine the individual resistances the values of L and H have to be
substituted in the form ulae by L
x
and H
x
of the respective sections.
U nder certain circum stances the follow ing w orking conditions m ay have to be
exam ined:
Inclined loaded sections.
D eclined loaded sections.
Section Calculation
Total R esistance
Peripheral Force
C ontinuous Load
C ontinuous Em pty
Start of Loading
Ending of Loading
F
tot
= F
U
= F
sec1
+ F
sec2
+ ... ( N )
L
1
L
2
L
3
L
4
sec 1
s
e
c
2
s
e
c
3
se
c 4

H
2 H
4
H
3
12.21
A fter the belt w idth B (m m ) has been established, the m axim um belt tension
for the steady state and non-steady state w orking conditions is calculated,
the nominal breaking strength k
N
of the belt can be ascertained and the
belt type chosen.
The nominal belt strength is equivalent to the minimum breaking
strength rounded up and observing other selection criteria results in the
belt type.
The safety factor of the selected belt is determ ined and verified. For certain
running conditions there are laid dow n m inim um safety values.
For textile and steel cord belts the follow ing safety factor values can be
used:
For m echanical joints and cold splices other factors apply (see m anufacturers
recom m endations).
Nominal breaking strength
Safety Factor
N om inal belt strength steady T
m ax *
S
B
state w orking k
N
= ( N /m m )
B
*
c
v
N om inal belt strength T
A m ax *
S
A
non-steady state running k
N
= ( N /m m )
B
*
c
v
T
m ax
( N ) m axim um belt tension steady state w orking
T
A m ax
( N ) m axim um belt tension non-steady state w orking
c
v
( - ) factor for loss of strength at the splice joint. Values see Page 11.9
B ( m m ) belt w idth
k
N *
B
*
c
v
k
N *
B
*
c
v
S
B
= ( - ) S
A
= ( - )
T
m ax
T
A m ax
W orking C onditions D rive C onditions
Steady state N on-steady state
SB SA
Favourable: few loading changes,
large pulleys, few bending 6.7 4.8
stress changes
N orm al 8.0 5.4
U nfavourable: m any loading changes,
sm all pulleys, frequent bending 9.5 6.0
stress changes
Steady state N on-steady state
12.22
For the selection and correct dim ensioning of the belt type a num ber of crite-
ria and principal influences need to be taken into account. Firstly is the
m axim um belt tension decisive in the dim ensioning of the carcase. It is
essential to observe the factors of safety for both the running and start-up
conditions. A s w ell as these calculations, further conditions w hich could
influence the strength, num ber of plies and quality of the belt have to be
considered.
The belt nom inal strength K
N
is rounded up to the next standard belt type.
W hen rounding dow n, the safety factor needs to be checked. Further C riteria
have to be observed.
W ith the safety factor S the influence of the follow ing are considered:
A dditional stresses at curves
O verload at start-up
Tensile strength loss due to disproportionate contribution of the plies
Strength loss due to im pact
D eleterious effects from penetration, ageing etc.
The values according to the table on page 12.21 should be observed. For the
start-up condition the value T
A m ax
is used w hen calculating because at start-
up the friction values of the drive pulley increase for a brief period of tim e.
W ith sm aller installations it is not alw ays necessary to verify the calculated
value of S
A
.
C ertain characteristics of the m aterial load m ay in turn affect the belt w idth
dim ensioning. The w ider the belt and the heavier the load the higher the
strength and the thicker the belt construction irrespective of the calculated
strength requirem ent.
W ith the help of the Belt Selection Table (see page 12.25) the appropriate
belt type can be determ ined depending on the belt width, lump size and
bulk density. W ith a belt of a lesser type than that recom m ended there is no
guarantee of stable running.
In the case of m ultiply belts such as the SU PER FO R T range, the strength of
one ply is lost at the joint. W ith highly stressed and im pacted belts this has to
be taken into account additionally. In general the carcases of w ider belts
should contain m ore plies. This does not apply to special constructions such
as D U N LO FLEX and TR IO FLEX.
The im pact energy due to the free fall height of m aterial, can be reduced at
the loading point by m eans of deflection plates, chute and screen bars etc. If
this is not possible or only so to a lim ited extent m ore or higher strength plies
should be considered. In special cases a breaker ply is em bedded in the car-
rying side cover to project the carcase.
W hen hot materials are to be conveyed the appropriate heat resistant quali-
ty rubber covers have to be selected. In so doing it is necessary to differentia-
te betw een the tem perature of the load and the perm issible tem perature of
the belt. The carrying side cover should be thicker than norm al and stronger
plies specified. In this w ay the heat absorption capability is increased and the
elongation due to the influence of heat is reduced.
Further influences are:
The belt speedand hence the heating up and cooling dow n periods.
The material lump sizeand the contact density on the carrying side cover.
Installation location (inside or outside, open or closed) and hence perhaps
the effect of a heat concentration.
Selection of Belt Type
Belt Nominal Strength
Belt Safety
Load support
Number of Plies
Impact energy
High Temperature
12.23
W ith extrem e low tem perature conditions account m ust be taken of the hig-
her flexing resistance of the belt. Select the fiction factor f accordingly. The
cover quality should be one containing a high percentage of natural rubber.
D epending upon the com pounding of the rubber, belts can be used dow n
to -30C (m axim um to -40C ). PVC belts dow n to -15C .
W ith thicker and stronger belts it is necessary to verify w hether the belt w ill
conform to the troughing angle of the idlers. For good troughing conditions
approx 40% of the belt w idth w hen running em pty should be m aking tangen-
tial contact. A pproxim ately 10% should m ake contact w ith the centre carrying
idler roller (R ecom m endation see Page 12.29).
W hen selecting belt covers, not only the quality appropriate for the load m ate-
rial has to be considered, but it is also necessary to ensure there is sufficient
thickness of cover on both the carrying and pulley sides of the belt. If the car-
rying side cover is m uch thicker than 3 tim es the pulley side cover there is
the risk of the belt curling at its edges. (R ecom m endations see Page 12.30).
W ith steep inclined conveying using profiled belts from the C hevron or H igh
C hevron ranges, a carcase should be selected that is 1 or 2 plies stronger
than calculated or in accordance w ith the belt selection table. B y doing this
the running stability is im proved especially under w et and frosty conditions.
This can also be an advantage w ith sm ooth surface belts w hich convey stee-
per than 12.
N orm al cover qualities tend to sw ell even if the load to be conveyed has only
the sm allest percentage of oil or fats and the rubber tends to soften. A ccount
has to be taken as to w hether the oil or fat is m ineral or vegetable based.
A lso the tem perature and possibly acidity has to be taken into consideration.
To convey food stuffs, the cover quality m ust com ply w ith N ational and
International regulations. O ne has to differentiate betw een unpacked and
packed food-stuffs. The m ost im portant regulations at present are:
FD A /U SD A : Food and D rug A dm inistration U .S.
U nbedenklichkeitsem pfehlung XXVII. B G A
B ritish C ode of Practice for Food C ontact A pplications.
If m aterials contain acids or alkalis the appropriate quality has to be selected.
The concentration and temperature play a decisive part. W ith increasing
concentration and tem perature the durability of the covers declines. They are
attacked by chem icals and sw ell. U nder certain conditions regard has to be
paid to the chem ical resistance of the carcase.
R ubber and PVC react differently.
Safety regulations can be im portant criteria in selecting the belt particulary
w ith installations w here there is a risk of fire or explosions.
Som e requirem ents dem and:
Flame resistant quality(to D IN 22103)
A belt is classed as flam e resistant if it does not burn or does not reignite
after the source of the flam e has been rem oved.
Electrical conductivity (Antistatic)
A conveyor belt is classed as being antistatic if the average value of the sur-
face resistance of the covers does not exceed 3
*
10
8
O hm .
Low Temperature
Troughability
Cover Thickness
Steep Angle Conveying
Oil & Fat Effects
Food Stuffs
Chemical Effects
Safety Regulations
12.24
Self extinguishing quality (Underground mines)
The definition of self extinguishing conveyor belting m eans a quality w hich
does not prom ote the spread of flam e from the initial fire. To determ ine the
com bustion characteristics a num ber of tests have to be conducted.
Occupational hygiene characteristics.
D ecom position products m ust not com e into contact w ith the skin, m ust not
be harm ful to the respiratory system nor increase filter resistance as a result
of clogging.
The appropriate data and testing regulations are laid dow n in N ational and
International Standards.
The course of the installation having certain dim ensions, troughing, transition,
vertical curves, horizontal curves and belt turnover can be decisive w hen
selecting the belt. See A ppendix 1.
The type of tensioning system and the am ount of available take-up travel can
be im portant considerations w hen selecting the belt type having particular
reference to elongation behaviour.
Design of the Installation
Method of Tensioning
Take-up Travel
Flam e Test G allery Test Propane B urner Test D rum Friction Test
D IN 22103 (12.74) D IN 22118 (12.74)
n = 190 10 m in
-1
N um ber of sam ples
6 ( 3 + 3 ) 5 1 6
Tim e in Flam e
45 s 15 m in 10 m in
R equirem ents
a) Sum of after flam e < 45 s a) A verage value of residual a) N o reignition
length # 400m m
b) Individual < 15 R esidual piece full w idth b) W ith flam e glow
b) N o sam ple residual length not affected preventative substitute
0 m m (slipobservation necessary)
c) N o ignition after air
current
sam ple
2
0
0
25
sam ple
1200 x 90
rem aining piece
2000 x B
sam ple
rem aining piece
450
200
G
12.25
Belt Reference Number In the first instance the belt is selected according to the tensile strength
requirem ents. In m any cases types selected on this basis alone, w ould be
inappropriate because they do not take into account the belt width, the bulk
density and the material lump size. Tracking, sag and transverse stability
need to be taken into account. It is recom m ended that the belt type selected
should be verified according to the belt type reference number.
1.W ith a lum p size over approxim ately 400 m m select one reference num ber
higher possibly.
2.W ith lum p sizes over 100 m m it is desirable that approxim ately 30% fines
be present. W ithout such fines the load im pact energy has to be taken
into account.
Material characteristics Indication number of belt type (mm)
B ulks D ensity Lum p Size
(t/m
3
) (m m ) 400 500 650 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000
up to 1 ! 0.5-10 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 4 4 5
1.1 - 1.5 100 1 1 1 2 3 3 4 4 5 5
+ 100 - - 2 2 3 3 5 5 5 5
1.6 - 2.5 100 - - 2 3 3 4 5 5 5 5
+ 100 - - 3 3 4 4 6 6 6 6
over 2.5 100 - - 3 3 4 5 6 6 6 6
+ 100 - - 4 4 5 5 6 7 7 7
Belt Type SUPERFORT DUNLOFLEX TRIOFLEX
Reference EP M ultiply 2 Ply B elt 3 Ply B elt
1 EP 200/3 D 200
2 EP 315/3 D 250
D 315
3 EP 250/4 D 400 T 250
EP 315/4
EP 500/3
EP 630/3
4 EP 400/4 D 500 T 315
EP 500/4 T 400
5 EP 315/5 T 500
EP 400/4
EP 500/5
EP 630/4
6 EP 500/5 T 630
EP 630/5
EP 800/4
7 EP 800/5 T 800
Instruction for the use of
the tables
1.Select the reference num -
ber from the first table
according to belt w idth,
bulk density and lum p size.
2. The second table contains a
num ber of alternatives for
the belt type under the
sam e reference num ber.
3. Final selection m ay have to
take into account other cri-
teria dependent on the w or-
king conditions.
12.26
A t the loading point the dem ands m ade of the belt are particularly high. The
load has to be accelerated to the belt speed and often at the sam e tim e it
changes in direction of travel and elevation. W ith coarse m aterial and high
falls the carcase of the belt is subject to additional stresses. These have to be
taken into account w hen dim ensioning the belt.
The impact energy E
f
is a m easure of the dem ands w hen loading a belt
from a height w ith large lum ps.
W ith the value E
f
and w ith the help of the diagram on Page 12.27. an approp-
riate belt type can be selected.
The surface condition of the m aterial influences w hat effect the im pact ener-
gy has. W ith soft rounded m aterial the belt is less stressed com pared w ith
that struck by hard sharp edged m aterial.
Load Demands
M ass of a piece
M aterial D ensity
State of M aterial
Volumes V
st
If the m ass of a piece of
m aterial is not know n, it can
be estim ated from it volum e.
W ith regard to physical shape
and by taking the edge length
1 or the diagonal measure-
ment corner to corner k, the
volum e V
st
can be established
E
f
= m
st *
g
*
H
f
( N m )
m
st
( kg ) m assof a piece (lum p)
g ( m /s
2
) acceleration due to gravity
H
f
( m ) delivery height (free fall or via chute)
M aterial D ensity M aterial D ensity
(kg/dm
3
) (kg/dm
3
)
A nthracite 1.5 - 1.7 C oke 1.2 - 1.4
C oncrete (G ravel) 2.2 M arble 2.5 - 2.8
B row n Iron Stone 3.5 - 4.0 Paper 0.7 - 1.2
B row n C oal (Lignite) 1.2 - 1.5 C oal B riquette 1.3
M anganese D ioxide 5.0 Sandstone 2.2 - 2.5
Earth 1.3 - 2.0 Shale 2.7
Fluorspar 3.2 Slag (Furnace) 2.5 - 3.0
G ypsum B urnt 1.8 Soapstone 2.7
G ranite 2.5 - 3.0 B itum inous C oal 1.3 - 1.4
Tim ber, G reen 0.7 - 1.3 R ock Salt 2.3 - 2.4
Tim ber, Seasoned 0.4 - 1.0 C lay, D ry 1.8
Lim e, B urnt 2.3 - 3.2 C lay, Fresh 2.6
Lim estone 1.9 Tile 1.4 - 2.0
Material Correction
A ngular, irregular Type according to
such as lim estone table. See page
and gravels 12.27
! 1.0-2.0 t/m
3
R ounded, soft such
as brow n coal 1 type low er
= 1.2 t/m
3
H ard, sharp edged
such as ores, slag 1-2 types higher
# 2.0 t/m
3
m
st
= V
st *
( kg )
V
st
( dm
3
) volum e of piece (see below )
( kg/dm
3
) density (see table)
V
h
V
v
V
1
V
Physical Volume Vst (dm
3
)
Shape Edge Length D iagonal
l (dm ) M easurem ent k (dm )
V
st
= 0,52
*
l
3
V
st
= 0,192
*
k
3
V
st
= l
3
k = 3
*
l
V
st
= 0,136
*
k
3
V
st
= 2
*
l
3
k = 6
*
l
V
st
= 0,083
*
k
3
V
st
= l
3
k = 5,25
*
l
l
l
k
0,5 l
2l
*
l
k
l
2l
l
k
12.27
This diagram show s belt types in relation to im pact energy and m akes an allo-
w ance of safety over that of the critical im pact energy w hich could otherw ise
lead to dam age.
To reduce the stress at the loading point
there are a num ber of constructive
m easures that can be taken such as
im pact deflection plates, grizzly bars or
roller grids, cushioned im pact idlers, gar-
land idlers, shaker tables and accelera-
ting belts etc. all of w hich help to protect
the belt.
A freely tensioned belt is able to absorb
greater im pact energy than a supported
belt.
The thickness of the covers also contributes to the reduction of the im pact
energy and should be calculated to suit. (R ecom m endations see Page 12.30).
The friction due to granulated material acceleration increases the abra-
sion and irregular lump acceleration causes m ore cover dam age, grooves
and tears.
A ccording to the predom inating m aterial characteristics either a high abrasion
resistant quality or a cut resistant quality has to be used.
Belt Selection
Impact Arrangements
Covers
Cover Quality
2
5
0
/
3
3
1
5
/
3
4
0
0
/
3
5
0
0
/
3
6
3
0
/
4

8
0
0
/
4
1
0
0
0
/
4
1
2
5
0
/
5
1
6
0
0
/
5
2
0
0
0
/
5
2
5
0
0
/
5
2
0
0
2
5
0
3
1
5
4
0
0
5
0
0

6
3
0
3
1
5
4
0
0
5
0
0
6
3
0
8
0
0

1
0
0
0
1
2
5
0
8
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
2
5
0
1
6
0
0
2
0
0
0
2
5
0
0
3
1
5
0
4
0
0
0
Belt Type
SU PER FO R T
3-5 ply
D U N LO FLEX
TR IO FLEX
Steel C ord
F
a
ll E
n
e
r
g
ie
E
(N
m
)
4
0
0
0 3
0
0
0 2
0
0
0 1
5
0
0 1
0
0
0
7
5
0
5
0
0
4
0
0
3
0
0
2
0
0
1
5
0
1
0
0
5
0
f
A brasion length
V
A cceleration relating to friction A cceleration relating to lum p shape
V
1
V
2
H
e
i
g
h
t

o
f

c
h
u
t
e
12.28
Term inal w ith Slatted Pulley.
12.29
A n appropriate m easure of troughability is necessary in order to provide good
belt tracking. This depends m ainly on the transverse stiffness of a belt and
its own weight. A sufficiently straight run m ay be expected if approxim ately
40% of the belt w idth w hen running em pty, m akes contact w ith the carrying
idlers. A pproxim ately 10% should m ake tangential contact w ith the centre
idler roller.
For norm al belt types minimum belt widths for a certain troughing angle can
be estim ated.
The test of troughability m ay be carried out according to ISO R 703 (1975)
or D IN 22102 (1991).
A 150 m m long full w idth belt test piece is suspended, friction free, by m eans
of cords w hose lengths are according to the belt w idth. A fter 5 m inutes the
sag s is m easured and the sag ratio s/B is determ ined.
Sag Ratio s/B (m inim um values)
Troughability
Test of Troughability
Troughing A ngle 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
Factor c
0.64 0.71 0.77 0.83 0.89 0 .93 1.00

M aterial of W eft B Z P ST
Value k
W
0.44 0.40 0.38 0.29
B elt W eight
(kg/m
2
) 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
Factor c
G
0.50 0.47 0.44 0.41 0.38 0.37 0.36 0.355 0.35 0.345 0.34
Troughing A ngle 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
Sag s/B 0.08 0.10 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.20 0.23 0.26
b
2
b 3
b
1
B
Suspension cords
Belt sam ple
B
S
b " 40% of B
b
2
" 10% of b
B # d
*
c
*
k
W *
c
G
( m )
d ( m m ) thickness of carcase
c ( - ) factor for troughing angle
k
W
( - ) value for carcase m aterial
c
G
( - ) factor for belt w eight
M inim um B elt W idth
12.30
The cover thicknesses are selected in such a m anner as to provide protection
to the carcase throughout a belts life and hence econom ic viability.
The thickness of the carrying side cover is m ainly dependent upon the
characteristics of the load m aterials (lum p size, abrasiveness, density, tem pe-
rature) and conditions at the loading point.
C hem ical effects (oil, acidity etc.) and the effects of m aterial tem perature are
considered separately. C over thicknesses should be such that the ratio car-
rying side to pulley side does not exceed 3:1.
Cover Thickness
Loading Conditions
R ating N um ber
Value d
z
C arrying side cover d
T
= d
m
+ d
z
( m m )
d
M
(m m ) M inim um thickness
For textile belts : 1 to 2 m m depending on fabric
For ST belts: 0.7 * cord diam eter, m inim um 4m m
d
Z
(m m ) A ddition to m inim um thickness
The value d
z
is determ ined from the sum of the rating numbers for different
loading conditions and m aterial characteristics.
Loading C onditions Favourable A verage U nfavourable
H eight of fall (m m ) < 500 500-2000 > 2000
v - v
o
R elative speed
*
100 (% ) < 30 30-60 60-100
v
D am ping at loading point good norm al m oderate
Influence Factor Criteria Rating Number
Loading condition Favourable 1
A verage 2
U nfavourable 3
Loading cycle
> 60 1
20 to 60 2
< 20 3
Lum p size (m m ) < 50 1
50 to 100 2
> 150 3
B ulk density (t/m
3
) < 1.0 1
1 to 1.8 2
> 1.8 3
A brasiveness Slight 1
A verage 2
Severe 3
Sum of rating
num bers
d
z
(m m )
5 to 6 0 to 1
7 to 8 1 to 3
9 to 11 3 to 6
12 to 13 6 to 10
14 to 15 # 10
2
*
L
f
B
= (s)
v
12.31
D uring running the conveyor belt has to accom m odate the stress changes
that occur betw een start-up, running, full load running and running em pty.
These result in elastic elongation of the belt and thus a change in belt length.
This difference betw een the elongation under the installed pre-tension w ith
the conveyor at rest and the total elongation under full load running condi-
tions is the additional running elongation.
The elongation is not spread proportionally over the belt circum ference but is
dependent upon the effective belt tension and the elongation behaviour of
the plies i.e. the carcase m aterials.
The length change resulting from the pre-tension and the running elongation
is accom m odated by an appropriately dim ensioned take-up unit (see Page
6.1).
The elongation of the belt increases w ith increasing tem perature (hot m aterial
and high am bient tem perature). The take-up travel is calculated from the rela-
tion E = T/B / (H ooks Law ). This is calculated utilizing the average tensions
T
M o
on the carrying side run and T
M u
on the return side run.
For design purposes the follow ing calculation m ay be used:
For further inform ation regarding the elongation behaviour of conveyor
belts see A ppendix H .
Take-Up
Length C hanges
Take-up Travel Lengths
Take-Up Travel for
Design Purposes
T
1
+ T
2
T
3
+ T
4
T
ges
= + = ( - )
2
*
B
*
E 2
*
B
*
E 2
*
B
*
E
T
*
L
*
2 L
L = s
p
= ( m )
2
*
B
*
E 2
T
*
L T
*
L
s
p
= = ( m )
2
*
B
*
E 2 * B * k
D
* k
N
E ( - ) Elastic m odulus
L ( m ) C onveying length
L
ges
( m ) B elt length " 2
*
conveying length
k
D
( - ) Elongation value (see A ppendix 1.2)
k
N
( N /m m ) N om inal belt strength
(
bl
+
el
)
S
p
= L
*
( m )
100
bl
( % ) Perm anent elongation EP belts 0.2 - 0.4 %
ST belts -
el
( % ) Elastic elongation EP belts 1 - 2 %
ST belts 0.1 - 0.5%
Tension of the fully loaded belt
Tension of stationary or em pty belt
13.1
Calculation Example
B elt C onveyor w ith a single pulley head drive conveying sand and gravel,
lum p size up to 200 m m .
C apacity Q
m
= 1000 t/h
B ulk D ensity = 1.5 t/m
3
D egree of Filling = 70%
C onveying Length L = 258 m
C onveying H eight H = 17.9 m
B elt W idth B = 1200 m m
Troughing = 35 3 R oll
Service Data
Short Calculation c
B *
v + Q
m
277
*
1.68 + 1000
P
1
= = = 28.2 kW
c
L *
k
f
52
*
1
W idth Factor c
B
(see table 11.7)
Length Factor c
L
(see table 11.8)
Factor k
f
(see table 11.8)
H
*
Q
m
17.9
*
1000
P
2
= = = 48.8 kW
367 367
P
T
= P
1
+ P
2
= 77 kW
77
P
M
= = 85.6 kW
0.9
P
N
= 110 kW (selected)
c
R *
P
T
15
*
77
k = = = 917 N /m m
c
v *
v 0.75
*
1.68
Friction factor cR (see table Page 11.9)
B reaking strength loss c
v
(see table Page 11.9)
used = 0.3
B elt w ith 4 plies
EP 1000/4 8 + 4 m m covers
B elt w eight 25.4 kg
C arcase thickness 5.8 m m
40
6
17.9
4.8
2
1
2
C arrying Idler R ollers m
R o
= 22.3 kg
R eturn Idler R ollers m
R u
= 19.3 kg
Surcharge A ngle = 15
B elt Speed v = 1.68 m /s
Layout horizontal 40 m
inclined 212 m ca 4.8
horizontal 6 m
Pow er Em pty +
horizontal
C onveying
Pow er for Lift
Pow er at
drive pulley
R equired
m otor pow er
Installed
m otor pow er
B elt breaking
strength
B elt selection
13.2
Calculation Example
Peripheral Force
Peripheral Force
F
U
= C
*
f
*
L
*
g [ m
R
+ ( 2
*
m
G
+ m
L
)
*
cos ] + H
*
g
*
m
L
Factor C = 1.37
Friction factor f = 0.02
Drive Power and Belt Tension
22.3 19.3
m
R
= + = 18.6 + 9.6 = 28.2 kg/m
1.2 2
m
G
= 25.4 kg/m
1000
m
L
= = 165.3 kg/m
3.6
*
1.68
= 4.8 cos 4.8 = 0.997
k
A
= 1.5
(hydraulic coupling)
F
U
= 16897 + 29027 = 45924 N
F
A
= 45924
*
1.5 = 68885 N
45923
*
1.68
P
T
= = 77.2 kW
1000
drive degree of efficiency = 0.9
P
T
P
M
= = 85.7 kW
0.9
P
N
= 110 kW (selected)
( m
L
+ m
G
)
*
g
*
l
o
T
m in
= = 28061 N
8
*
0.01
W ith belt sag 1%
C arrying side idle pitch l
o
= 1.2m
68885 - 45924
a
A
= = 0.368 m /s
2
258
*
( 165.3 + 25.4 + 50.8 )
1.68
t
A
= = 4.56 s
0.368
1.68
*
4.56
s
A
= = 3.83 m
2
Load due to idlers
Load due to belt
Load due to m aterial
Incline
Start-up factor
Steady state
N on-steady state
Pow er at pulley
M otor pow er
Installed m otor pow er
M in. belt tension
A cceleration
Start-up tim e
Start-up distance
F
U
= 1.37
*
0.02
*
258
*
9.81[28.2+ (2
*
25.4+ 165.3)
*
0.997]+ 17.9
*
9.81
*
165.3
13.3
Calculation Example
Individual Resistances for Sequential Calculation
Case 1) Tension Weight at Discharge Point (close to T
2
)
T
A 2
= T
2
(constant tension)
T = T
A 2
- T
2
= 26424 - 22961 = 3463 N
W ith the value T belt tensions T
1
to T
4
are increased
T
1
= 72347 N T
A 1
= 95309 N
T
2
= 26424 N T
A 2
= 26424 N
T
3
= 23732 N T
A 3
= 26969 N
T
4
= 23732 N T
A 4
= 26969 N
T
m in
= 28061 N est ncessaire pour la flche de 1% , i.e. T
4
T
m in
T = T
m in
- T
4
= 28061 - 23732 = 4328 N
W ith the value T all belt tensions T
1
to T
4
and T
A 1
to T
A 4
w ill be increased
M ain resistance
Secondary resistance
Frictional R esistances
C arrying side
R eturn side
Slope R esistance
C arrying side
R eturn side
Inertial R esistance
C arrying side
R eturn side
R unning (steady state)
C ontrol T
1
Start-up (non-steady state)
C ontrol T
A 1
1st A djustm ent
2nd A djustm ent
Belt Tensions
F
H
= 0.02
*
258
*
9.81
*
[ 28.2 + ( 50.8 + 165.3 )
*
0.997 ] = 12333 N
F
N
= ( C - 1 )
*
F
H
= 12333
*
0.37 = 4563 N
F
o
= 0.02
*
258
*
9.81
*
[ 18.6 + ( 25.4 + 165.3 )
*
0.997 ] = 10566 N
F
u
= 0.02
*
258
*
9.81
*
( 9.6 + 25.4 )
*
0.997 = 1768 N
F
sto
= 17.9
*
9.81
*
( 25.4 + 165.3 ) = 33486 N
F
stu
= 17.9
*
9.81
*
25.4 = 4460 N
F
ao
= 0.368
*
258
*
( 16.7 + 25.4 + 165.3 ) = 19725 N
F
au
= 0.368
*
258
*
( 8.7 + 25.4 ) = 3237 N
Sequential Calculation T
1
to T
4
T
2
= F
U *
c
2
= 45924
*
0.5 = 22961 N
T
3
= 22962 + 1768 - 4460 = 20269 N
T
4
= T
3
= 20269 N
T
1
= 20269 + 4563 + 10566 + 33486 = 68884 N
Sum = 132383 N
T
1
= F
U *
c
1
= 45924
*
1.5 = 68884 N
T
A 2
= F
A *
c
2A
= 68886
*
0.3836 = 26424 N
T
A 3
= 26424 + 1768 - 4460 + 3237 = 26969 N
T
A 4
= T
A 3
= 26969 N
T
A 1
= 26969 + 4563 + 10566 + 33486 + 19725 = 95309 N
Sum = 175671 N
T
A 1
= F
A *
c
1A
= 68886
*
1.3836 = 95309 N
T
1
= 76675 N T
A 1
= 99637 N
T
2
= 30752 N T
A 2
= 30752 N
T
3
= 28061 N T
A 3
= 31297 N
T
4
= 28061 N T
A 4
= 31297 N
T = 163549 N T
A
= 192983 N
The stipulations T
2
= T
A 2
and T
4
T
m in
are fulfilled.
13.4
Calculation Example
Case 2) - Tension Weight at Tail (close to T
4
)
T
A 3
= T
3
(constant tension)
T = T
A 3
- T
3
= 26969 - 20269 = 6700 N
T
1
= 75584 N T
A 1
= 95309 N
T
2
= 29661 N T
A 2
= 26424 N
T
3
= 26969 N T
A 3
= 26969 N
T
4
= 26969 N T
A 4
= 26969 N
T = T
m in
- T
4
= 28061 - 20269 = 1092 N
Case 3) Fixed Take-up Tension, Location no Influence
T = T
A
T = (175671 - 132383) / 4 = 10822 N
T
1
= 79706 N T
A 1
= 95309 N
T
2
= 33783 N T
A 2
= 26424 N
T
3
= 31091 N T
A 3
= 26969 N
T
4
= 31091 N T
A 4
= 26969 N
= 175671 N T
A
= 175671 N
T = T
m in
- T
A 4
= 28061 - 26969 = 1092 N
For C ase 1 (tension w eight at discharge) the belt tensions T
1
and T
2
w ould
suffice after A djustm ent 1. To transm it the peripheral force F
U
friction cut off
w ise. The condition T
1
/T
2
e
w ould be fulfilled w ith = 0.3,

A
= 0.35 and
= 210 :
R unning : T
1
/T
2
= 72347 / 26424 = 2.74 3
Start-up : T
A 1
/T
A 2
= 95309 / 26424 = 3.6 = e
W ith this condition how ever the belt w ould not have the desired degree of
sag of 1% at the tail end and fine grained m aterial could escape under the
skirtboards at the loading point. The belt w ould undulate excessively resulting
in high w ear and tear and extra energy consum ption.
Sag w ithout adjustm ent:
The degree of sag desired w as 1%
1st A djustm ent
2nd A djustm ent
Belt Tensions
Stipulation
1st A djustm ent
2nd A djustm ent
Belt Tensions
Stipulation
Note
T
1
= 80797 N T
A 1
= 96401 N
T
2
= 34874 N T
A 2
= 27516 N
T
3
= 32183 N T
A 3
= 28061 N
T
4
= 32183 N T
A 4
= 28061 N
T = 180037 N T
A
= 180037 N
1. T = T
A
2. T
4
or T
A 4
T
m in
T
1
= 76675 N T
A 1
= 96401 N
T
2
= 30752 N T
A 2
= 27516 N
T
3
= 28061 N T
A 3
= 28061 N
T
4
= 28061 N T
A 4
= 28061 N
T = 163549 N T
A
= 180039 N
1. T
4
= T
A 4
2. T
4
T
m in
( 165.3 + 25.4 )
*
9.81
*
1.2
h
d
= = 0.0118
23732
*
8
13.5
Calculation Example
Comparison of various Take-up Systems
Evaluation of Belt Safety Factor, Pre-tension and Take-up Travel
a)For the belt and installation, C ase 2 (take-up w eight at tail) is the m ost
favourable. The belt safety is alm ost the sam e in all three cases. The pre-
tension is substantially less in case 2 and results in the low est stresses for
both the belt and the installation.
b)W ith the fixed take-up, the calculated travel m ust be taken into account
otherw ise a shortening of the belt m ay be necessary later on.
Belt Safety
Pre-tension Force (kg)
Take-up Travel
Result of the
Computer Calculation
k
N *
c
v *
B
S =
T
X
W orking condition
B elt Safety S
C ase 1 C ase 2 C ase 3
steady state 11.73 11.73 11.13
non-steady state 9.03 9.33 9.33
W orking condition
Take-up Travel (m m )
at rest 1259 1149 1843
steady state 1674 1674 1843
non-steady state 1975 1843 1843
Pre-tension 2
*
T
A 2
2
*
T
A 4
T/4
*
2
Tension force (kg) 6265 5720 9176
T
*
L
s
p
= ( m m )
2
*
B
*
k
D *
k
N
k
N
( N /m m ) N om inal belt strength
c
v
( - ) Loss of strength at the joint
T
X
( N ) B elt tension at point X
T in C ase 1
at rest T = 4
*
30752 = 123008 N
running T = 163549 N
at start-up T = 192983 N
elongation value k
D
( - ) = 10.5
DUNLOP-ENERKA Comparison of Tension Systems
Safety Factors Discharge Tail Fixed Take-up
Running 11.7 11.7 11.1
Start-up 9.0 9.3 9.3
Pre-tension
Minimum kg 5387 5500 8955
Maximum kg 6268 5721 9175
Working elongation % 0.28 0.27
Total elongation % 0.77 0.71 0.71
13.6
Calculation Example
Pulley Diameter
D
A
= c
Tr
*
d = 108
*
5.8 = 626 m m
c
Tr
( - ) Param eter for the belts types. See Page 11.10
d ( m m ) C arcase thickness
D rive pulley D
A
= 630 m m (selected)
B end pulley D
B
= 500 m m
Snub/deflection pulley D
C
= 315 m m
v
*
60 1.68
*
60
n
T
= = = 51 U /m in
*
D
A
3.14
*
0.63
D A ( m ) Trom m eldurchm esser
F
U A
*
D
A
68885
*
0.63
M
A
= = = 21699 N m
2 2
( T
A 1
+ T
A 2
) 99637 + 30752
F
A T
= = = 13291 Kg
9.81 9.81
( T
A 1
+ T
A 2
) 130389
p
T
= = = 17.3 N /cm
2
D
A
*
B 63
*
120
D A und B in cm
L
M
= x
*
s
*
sin = 8
*
367
*
sin 35 = 1684 m m
x = 8 Factor for carcase
s = 367 m m Side idler roller contact m ade by belt
= 35 Troughing angle
s
2
367
2
h =
*
sin =
*
sin 35 = 65 m m
B 1200
L
red
= x
*
( s
*
sin - h ) m m
L
red
= 8
*
( 367
*
sin 35 - 65 ) = 1164 m m
v
*
60 1.68
*
60
n
T
= = = 51 R /
m in
*
D
A
3.14
*
0.63
D A ( m ) Pulley diam eter
F
U A
*
D
A
68885
*
0.63
M
A
= = = 21699 N m
2 2
( T
A 1
+ T
A 2
) 99637 + 30752
F
A T
= = = 13291 kg
9.81 9.81
( T
A 1
+ T
A 2
) 130389
p
T
= = = 17.3 N /cm
2
D
A
*
B 63
*
120
D A and B in cm
s
2
367
2
h =
*
sin =
*
sin 35 = 65 m m
B 1200
L
red
= x
*
( s
*
sin - h )
L
red
= 8
*
( 367
*
sin 35 - 65 ) = 1164 m m
Pulley revolutions
M axim um torque
Pulley loading
D rive pulley
Surface pressure
Lift of pulley
for troughing 30
R educed
transition length
13.7
Calculation Example
R
e
= x
*
s
*
sin = 125
*
367
*
sin 35 = 26.3 m
x = 125 (factor for carcase)
T
x
29703
R
a
= = = 120 m
m
G
*
9.81
*
cos 25.4
*
9.81
*
cos 35
Tx = T4 + f
*
Lx
*
g
*
( m R o + m G + m L ) = 29703 N B elt tension at start of curve
T4 = 28061 N B elt tension w hen running
Lx = 40 m H orizontal distance before the curve
C o-ordinates of beginning X = R
a *
tan = 120
*
0.0839 = 10.1 m
and end of the curve Y = 0.5
*
R
a *
tan
2
= 0.4 m
17.9
sin = = 0.0844 = 4.8
212
X
Y
R
a
13.8
Calculation Example
In the regions w here the belt goes from flat to troughed, trough vertical and
horizontal curves or is turned over, additional stresses and strains occur at the
edge zones or in the belt centre. This can result in a reduction in the perm issi-
ble m inim um safety at the belt edges or belt centre. The tension can becom e
negative creating buckling at the centre or flapping at the edges. For additio-
nal inform ation see A ppendix 1.
The required values for the calculation for the belt safety running em pty at
head and tail w ere extracted from the com puter calculation.
Additional Tension
Adjustment
Safety in the edge zone
Elongation at T
1
(running)
C urve length
A dditional elongation
Total elongation
Elongation at Belt Centre
Discharge Point
M in. safety at running em pty
Elongation at T
1
em pty
Total elongation
Elongation at Belt Centre
at Tail
M in. safety at running em pty
Elongation at T1 em pty
Total elongation
1
0
= = 0.00814
10.5
*
11.7
3.14
=
*
35 = 0.61056
180
1200
2
*
0.6105
2
367
2
367
K
=
* *
( 0.5 - ) = 0.00705
1684
2
1200
2
3
*
1200
ges
= 0.00814 + 0.00705 = 0.01519
1
S
m in
= = 6.27 4 no overstress
10.5
*
0.01519
S
m in
= 25.8 at discharge point (head)
1
0
= = 0.003692
10.5
*
25.8
1200
2
*
0.6105
2
367
3
M
=
*
= 0.0018049
1684
2
3
*
1200
3
m in
= 0.003692 - 0.0018049 = 0.0018871
m in
0 no buckling
S
m in
= 32.1 (value from com puter calculation)
1
0
= = 0.0029669
10.5
*
32.1
M
= 0.0018049
m in
= 0.0029669 - 0.0018049 = 0.001162
m in
0 no buckling
13.9
Calculation Example
Computer Calculation
Adjustments of
Transition Lengths
D U N LO P-EN ER KA C O N VEYO R B ELT C A LC U LA TIO N D A TE 06.08.93
D rive System : Single Pulley H ead D rive Firm : M usterm an
Tension : G TU at H ead D rive Project : Exam ple
C oupling : H ydraulic C oupling Position : 12
INSTALLATION MATERIAL CONVEYOR BELT
C apacity 1000 t/h M aterial Sand & G ravel B elt Type m ultiply
C onveying Length 258.0 m D ensity A m biant B elt Type EP 1000/4
Lift 17.9 m Lum p Size (m m ) 1.50 t/m 3 C overs 8 + 4 m m
belt W idth 1200 m m Tem perature m ax. 50 Q uality R A
B elt Speed 1.68 m /s Surcharge A ngle 15 W eight 25.4 kg/m
DRIVE PULLEYS IDLER ROLLERS
Pow er R unning Em pty7.0 kW D rive Pulley 630 m m R oller dia. C arrying 133 m m
A dditional Pow er 0.0 kW Tension Pulley 500 m m R oller dia. R eturn 133 m m
R equired Pow er 85.7 kW Snub Pulley 315 m m R oller W eight C arrying 22.3 kW
Installed Pow er 110.0 kW M ax. Torque 21699 N m R oller W eight R eturn 19.3 kg
D egree of Efficiency 0.90 D rive Pulley R ev 51.0 R /m in R oller Pitch C arrying 1.20 m
A ngle of W rap 210 Load-D rive Pulley 13290 kg R oller Pitch R eturn 2.00 m
Friction C oefficient 0.020 Tension Pulley 6268 kg Loading, C arrying 229 kg
D rive Factor 1.5 Friction Factor Loading, R eturn 51 kg
B elt Sag 1.0 % D rive Pulley 0.30 R ev. C arrying R oller 241.4 r.p.m
W eight 0 kg Idler Type 3 Port 35
Safety Factor : Running SB =11.7 Acceleration Line : Loaded 4.56 S
: Start-up SA =9.0 : Empty 0.51
PRE-TENSION CRITERIA BELT SAG SLIP SAFETY FACTOR
R unning A t Start-up R unning A t Start-up
B elt Tension T
1
(N ) 76667 99629 72349 95311
B elt Tension T
2
(N ) 30743 30743 26425 26425
B elt Tension T
3
(N ) 28061 31297 23743 26979
B elt Tension T
4
(N ) 28061 31297 23743 26979
B elt Tension Sum 163532 192967 146260 175695
Tension W eight 6268 kg 5387 kg
Take-up Travel (absolute): M ovem ent D istance W eight: B elt Elongation:
W eight at R est............1259 m m A t R est.......................0 m m U nder Pre-tension .......0.49 %
Full Load R unning .......1674 m m Full Load R unning ......415 m m W orking Elongation .....0.28 %
Full Load Start-up ........1976 m m Full Load Start-up .......717 m m Total Elongation...........0.77 %
Elongation Value .........10.5 (-)
M easurem ent of Installation Elem ents:
Troughing Transition .........................1686 m m C onvex Vertical C urve .......................... 26 m
Pulley Lift ......................................... 65 m m C oncave Vertical C urve ......................... 119 m
R educed Troughing Transition ..........1170 m m M easurem ent xa horizontal ..................10.0 m
M easurem ent ya vertical ...................... 0.4 m
For calculation purposes missing data assumed.
Data with Value 0 were not calculated i.e., not fed in.
We cannot take responsibility for the calculation.
Adjustment of Additional Tension Transition Lengths
D rive : Single Pulley H ead D rive W eight at D ischarge
B elt W idth : 1200 m m 3 roll 35 KD = 10.5 B elt EP 1000/4
T
1
Full = 76667 N D ischarge Full SB = 11.7 D ischarge L norm al = 1686 m m
T
1
Em pty = 34939 N D ischarge Em pty SB = 25.8 Tail L norm al = 1686 m m
T
4
Full = 28061 N H eck Full SB = 32.1 D ischarge L reduced = 1170 m m
T
4
Em pty = 28064 N H eck Em pty SB = 32.1 Tail L reduced = 1170 m m
D yn. Tensile Strength Sm in = 4.0 Pulley Lift = 65 m m
B elt Edge B elt C entre
C riteria
D ischarge L norm al 0.01516 6.28 0.00189 N o buckling
Tail L norm al 0.01001 9.51 0.00116 N o buckling
D ischarge L reduced 0.01586 6.01 0.00146 N o buckling
Tail L reduced 0.01071 8.89 0.00074 N o buckling
C ontinue C alculation (1) Vertical C urve (3) B elt Turnover (5)
C hange Transition Length (2) H orizontal C urve (4)
13.10
Calculation Example
D U N LO P C onveyor B elts at C rusher Plant.
14.1
Slider Bed Belt Conveyors
The conveying of unit loads is generally done by slider belts w ith conveying
lengths up to about 100m . W ith heavy loads or long length conveying, the
belt is tracked over flat or slightly troughed idlers.
The supporting or slider surface can be m ade from various m aterials w ith
different friction values e.g. steel, w ood or synthetic.
To avoid a `suctioneffect w ith the belt, transverse slots can be m ade at
intervals in the supporting surface and perhaps relieving rollers fitted.
The belt w idth should be som ew hat greater than the longest edge length of a
single piece except w ith pieces loaded in the direction of belt travel.
The speed of the slider belt m ust be in keeping w ith the type of unit load. As
a rule V is from 0.2 to 1.5 m/s.
Slider Belts
Support Surface
B elt W idths
B elt W idth
Speed
C arrying Side R eturn Side
Supporting Surface
Idlers
D rive Pulley
Tail and Tension
Pulley
B m ax. edge length + 100 ( m m )
z
*
( l + a )
v = ( m /s ) W ith a load of z pieces per hour
3600
l + a
v = ( m /s ) W ith a load at tim e interval t
t
z ( pieces/hour) N um ber of pieces per hour
l ( m ) Length of piece
a ( m ) Spacing of pieces
t ( s ) Loading interval
v
l a
m
G
+ m
L
p
m
= ( kg/m
2
)
B
For bulk loads
14.2
The conveying capacity can be evaluated from the given data.
For bulk loads see appropriate tables.
The total resistance to m otion and therefore the pulley peripheral force F
U
is
calculated from the sum of the individual resistances. W ith slider belts the
sum of the main resistances from friction on the carrying and return side is
relatively high com pared w ith belts supported by idlers.
The secondary resistances are independent of the installation length and only
occur at certain points. O nly w ith relatively short installations is the value
greater that 1.
The secondary resistances are estim ated using factor C
g
. The value is depen-
dent on the average surface loading. The effect of the secondary resistances
is considerably sm aller than obtained from the friction value
g
betw een belt
and supporting surface.
Conveying Capacity
Resistance to Motion
Peripheral Force
Secondary R esistances
Factor C
g
Average Surface Loading
m
Q
m
= 3.6
*
v
* ( t/h )
l + a
F
U
= C
g *
( F
o
+ F
u
) + F
st
+ F
S
( N )
C onveying A verage Surface Loading
Length p
m
(kg/m
2
)
L (m )
5 -10 up to 300
2.5 1.8 1.04
5 1.4 1.02
10 1.2 1.01
25 1.09 1
50 1.05 1
> 100 1 1
z
m *
m
Q
m
= 3.6
*
v
*
( t/h )
L
z
*
m
Q
m
= ( t/h )
1000
m ( kg ) M ass of piece
z
m
( St/m ) N um ber each m etre z
m
= L / ( l + a )
z ( St/h ) Pieces per hour
L ( m ) C onveying Length
m
G
m
L
p
m
= + ( kg/m
2
)
B b
For unit loads
b
B
l
m
G
(kg/m ) Load due to belt
m
L
(kg/m ) Load due to m aterial (see page 12.6)
B (m ) B elt w idth
b (m ) Load w idth or w idth of piece
l (m ) Length of piece
14.3
Frictional resistance occurs on the carrying and return side either sliding or
rolling resistance depending on how the belt is supported.
The average friction value betw een belt and supporting surface w as deter-
m ined thus:
Surface load p = 20 - 500 N /m m
2
Speed v = 0.2 - 0.8 m /s
The friction value
g
is m ainly depen-
dent upon the com bination of the belt
under side surface and the tem pera-
ture, the speed and the surface load-
ing.
W ith increasing tem perature the fric-
tion value
g
increases w ith PVC run-
ning side surfaces and decreases
w ith fabric surfaces.
Independent of the characteristics of the slider surface, the friction value g
increases w ith increasing speed and decreases w ith increasing surface loa-
ding. W hen selecting the friction value these param eters can be taken into
account according to the given w orking conditions.
Frictional Resistances
C arrying Side
R eturn Side
Friction Value
g
Tem perature
Speed Surface
Loading
F
o
=
g *
L
*
g
*
( m
L
+ m
G
) ( N )
F
o
= 2
*
z
R
+ 0.02
*
L
*
g
*
( m
L
+ m
G
) ( N )
F
u
=
g *
L
*
g
*
m
G
( N )
F
u
= 2
*
z
R
+ 0.02
*
L
*
g
*
m
G
( N )
m
L
(kg/m ) Load due to m aterial m
L
= Q
m
/ 3.6 / v ( kg/m )
m
G
(kg/m ) Load due to belt
z
R
(pieces) N um ber of rollers
g
(-) Friction value betw een belt and supporting surfaces
(see table)
Slider B ed Surface - U pper Surface Tem perature (C )
Steel Sheet Polished Synthetic H ard W ood
-20 0 + 18 + 40 + 18 + 18
C otton (bare) 0.75 0.70 0.45 0.35 0.40 0.35
EP (bare, im pregnated) 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.25 0.30 0.25
R ubber covered 0.90
C otton (PVC im pregnated) 0.60 0.55 0.50 0.40 0.45 0.35
PVC (film ) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.55 0.60 0.50
PVC (sm ooth) 0.55 0.70 1.00 1.70 1.30 0.95
PVC (textured) 0.50 0.65 0.80 1.30 1.10 0.75
Sliding
O n rollers
Sliding
O n rollers
1,4
1,2
1,0
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0
-20 0 20 40 60 80 100
PVC
C otton R ayon
(bare)
B , Z, EP
Tem perature t in C
F
r
i
c
t
i
o
n

v
a
l
u
e

g
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0
10 20 30 4050
steel plate
hard w ood
Surface pressure p in N /m m
F
r
i
c
t
i
o
n
v
a
l
u
e

g
hard synthetic
2
100 200 300 400
0,8
0,6
0,4
0,2
0
0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8
steel plate
hard w ood
B elt speed v m /s

F
r
i
c
t
i
o
n
v
a
l
u
e

g
hard synthetic
14.4
The special resistances have to be calculated separately according to the con-
ditions existing.
R esistance F
A 1
Skirtboard seals
R esistance F
A w
Tripper (throw -off carriage)
R esistance F
A b
Scraper
R esistance F
M e
Knife edges
R esistance F
Sp
U nit load barrier
R esistance F
La
Load deflector
R esistance from side skirtboards used to channel the load stream (value).
R esistance due to trippers (values)
R esistance due to simple scraper for cleaning belts upper surface.
R esistances due to knife edges (value). Knife edges are used to change the
direction of very thin slider belts w here particularly sm all transition gaps are
necessary. A t such knife edges relatively high tem peratures m ay develop, up
to approx. 150C .
Slope Resistance F
st
Special Resistance F
S
Resistance F
Al
Resistance F
Aw
Resistance F
Ab
Resistance F
Me
F
st
= H
*
g
*
m
L
( N )
H ( m ) elevation (lift or fall)
F
S
= F
A l
+ F
A w
+ F
A b
+ F
M e
+ F
Sp
+ F
La
F
A l
= 160
*
l
f
( N )
l
f
( m ) Length of skirtboards per m etre of conveying length
F
A w
= z
*
k ( N )
B elt W idth Factor k for Tripper
(m m ) fixed m ovable
300 - 500 1000 1100
650 1500 1700
800 2000 2200
1000 3500 3600
1200 4400 5100
> 1200 4700 5400
F
M e
= z
*
0.1
*
B ( N )
F
A b
= z
*
800
*
B ( N )
z ( - ) num ber of trippers
k ( - ) factor
z ( - ) N um ber of scrapers
z ( - ) N um ber of knife edges
14.5
R esistance due to unit load blockage.
W hen conveying unit loads tem porary hold-ups m ay occur due to congestion,
that is, the belt slides underneath the loaded units resulting in a frictional resi-
stance. This friction resistance can be very high in com parison to the frictional
resistance on the belts running side.
R esistance due to sideways transfer of load w hen conveying horizontally
(load deflector). For bulk and unit loads the follow ing values can be used.
For light bulk and unit loads these values m ay be reduced. W ith sidew ays
transfer of the load, the belt is deflected in the opposite direction.
A ppropriate tracking devices need to be built in.
Resistance F
Sp
Resistance F
La
F
Sp
=
l*
g
*
L
1 *
m
L *
cos - m
L *
H
1
( N )
L
1
( m ) H old-up length
( ) G radient of installation
l
( - ) Friction factor belt/load
This friction value can differ w idely and depending on the load can be
greater than the friction value
g
betw een belt and slider surface.
H
1
( m ) Lift (or fall)
m
L
( kg/m ) Load due to m aterial
Slider
Slider Surface
H old-up D evice
L
1
B elt W idth
(m m )
500 650-800 1000-2000
F
La
(N ) 800 1500 3000-3500
D eflector
14.6
The m otor pow er PN is selected from the standard list w ith the appropriate
rounding up or from existing stock.
The drive force of a slider belt installation is as a rule over-dim ensioned
because of the low er pow er requirem ents. M ostly squirrel cage m otors w ith
direct on-line starting are used. The start-up torque is approx. 2 - 2.6 tim es
higher than the nom inal torque.
If F
A
2.6 * F
U
, then calculate thus:
This prevents excessive over-dim ensioning of the m otor and thus the use of
an overstrength belt.
The belt tensions are calculated from the peripheral forces F
U
et F
A
.
In selecting the belt, the highest value is the deciding factor.
The friction value depends on the running side of the belt and the surface
of the drive pulley.
For factors c
1
and c
1A
: see A ppendix F.1.
A t start-up the follow ing m ay be used:
Drive Power
M otor Pow er
Installed Pow er
Peripheral Force F
A
N ote
Belt Tensions
Friction Value
D rive Factor c
1
F
U *
v
P
T
= ( kW )
1000
P
T
P
M
= ( kW )
P
N
( kW )
P
N
F
A
= 1.5 * F
U
* ( N )
P
M
F
A
= 2.6 * F
U
( N )
T
1
= F
U
* c
1
( N )
T
1A
= F
A
* c
1A
( N )
R unning Side D rive Pulley C ondition Friction
of belt value
R ubbered Lagged dry 0.30
dam p 0.25
B are dry 0.22
dam p 0.20
Fabric Lagged dry 0.25
dam p 0.22
B are dry 0.15
dam p 0.15
A
= + 0.05
14.7
In selecting the belt type for a slider application, the tensile strength is
largely of secondary consideration because of the low stresses. N early
alw ays the belts are over dim ensioned. Transverse stability and the loca-
tionof the belt are particular considerations.
A s a rule a check on the factor of safety of the selected belt is sufficient.
O ften w ith slider belt installations, extrem ely sm all pulleys are used, for
exam ple, to enable the bridging of gaps betw een tw o installations.
The advice of the belt m anufacturer should be sought, particularly about pro-
blem s of m aking the belt endless.
Belt Types
Pulley Diameter
R ufftop B elt for Sack C onveying
k
N
* B * c
V
S = 10-12
T
m ax
T
m ax
* S
k
N
= N /m m
B * c
V
K
N
( N /m m ) N om inal breaking strength
C
V
( - ) Factor for the loss of breaking strength at the joint.
See Page 11.9.
T
m ax
( N ) M axim um belt tension
P
N
S = ( 6 - 8 ) *
P
M
Safety Factor
B elt type
15.1
Bucket Elevators
W ith bucket elevators different bulk loads such as sand, gravel, chippings,
coal, cem ent, grain, flour, fertilizer etc. can be conveyed either vertically or
sloping upw ards. B elts w ith buckets attached are used as the carrying
m edium . W ith bucket elevators, great heights for exam ple, over 100m can be
surm ounted w ith high strength belts. They run w ith low noise levels and low
vibrations at a relatively high speed. They require only a sm all ground area
and are preferred in buildings, silos and w arehouses.
N om inal C apacity V
B
(l) The nom inal capacity V
B
of the bucket is determ i-
ned from the geom etric dim ensions and a horizontal
surface filling level (w ater filling).
The type of bucket is determ ined in the m ain by the m aterial and the m ethod
of discharge either by gravitational or centrifugal em ptying.
DIN 15231 Flat bucket for light loads such as flour, sem olina, grain.
DIN 15232 Flat rounded bucket for light granulated loads such as grain.
DIN 15233 M edium deep bucket for sticky loads such as cane sugar.
DIN 15234 D eep buckets w ith a flat back w all for heavy pulverized loads or
coarse ground loads such as sand, cem ent, coal.
DIN 15235 D eep buckets w ith curved back w all for light flow ing or rolling
loads such as fly ash and potatoes.
For dim ensions, capacities and w eights, see Page 15.12.
For high speeds (V = 1.05 to 4.2 m /s) according to the type of m aterial as a
rule the flat, flat h
B
rounded or m edium deep buckets are used (centrifugal
discharge).
Forlow speeds (v = 0.42 to 1.05 m /s) the deep closed buckets are used (gra-
vitational discharge). See also Page 15.3.
Bucket Elevators
Bucket Types
V
B
Q
V
= 3.6
*
v
*

*
( m
3
/h )
a
Q
m
= Q
V *
( t/h )
Q
V *
a
V
B
= ( litres )
3.6
*
v
*

Q
m *
a
V
m
= ( kg )
3.6
*
v
*

V
B
( l ) N om inal capacity of one bucket
( - ) D egree of filling
v ( m /s ) Speed
a ( m ) B ucket Pitch
( t/m
3
) B ulk density of load
e
B
( m m ) B ucket Projection
h
B
( m m ) B ucket H eight
Load volum e
Load m ass
B ucket capacity
W eight of m aterial
per bucket
h
B
e
B
D IN 15231
h
B
e
B
D IN 15234
h
B
e
B
D IN 15235
h
B
e
B
D IN 15232
h
B
e
B
D IN 15233
Tam bour de com m ande
R acleur
R ouleaux pour la
stabilisation de la bande
G oulotte de chargem ent
Systm e de protection
contre les poussires
Tam bour de renvoi
Pied de llvateur
D chargem ent
H
a
u
t
e
u
r

d
v
a
t
i
o
n
D rive pulley
D ischarge
Scraper
Feed chute
H
e
i
g
h
t

o
f

e
l
e
v
a
t
o
r
s
R eturn pulley
Elevator boot
Support rollers
Protection against
falling m aterial
15.2
Bucket Elevators
The m easure of the effective utilization of the bucket capacity, is the degree
of filling.
M ajor influences are: M ethod of loading
Speed
B ucket spacing
B ucket shape
The speed depends upon the function of the bucket elevator, the type of
loading and discharge.
The follow ing speeds are recom m ended:
Degree of Filling
Speed
eff. bucket filling
=
nom inal capacity
Type of M aterial D egree of Filling
Potatoes, Turnips, O nions 0.6
G rain, B arley, R ye 0.75
Earth, Sand - dam p 0.5
dry 0.7
Sugar beet 0.5
Sliced beet 0.65
Fertilizer 0.75
C oal, C oke -large 0.5
fine 0.7
G ravel, Stone - large 0.5
fine 0.7
Sugar, Salt 0.75
M oulding sand - dry 0.6
Soya beans, Pulses 0.7
C em ent 0.75
Type of B ucket Elevator V (m /s)
Loading direct or by scoop action,
gravitational discharge, slow m oving for U p to 1 m /s
heavy m aterials such as ballast and earth.
C entrifugal discharge for norm al m aterial 1 - 2 m /s
such as sand and fertilizer.
A s a rule, centrifugal discharge, very fast 2 - 4 m /s
running, only w ith free flow ing or light and m ore
easily scooped m aterial such as grain
The loading i.e., the filling of the bucket can be done either directly or by
dredging action. Scoop loading is only possible w ith free flow ing m aterials
and is to be recom m ended.
The bucket attachm ents and bucket brim are subject to arduous duty. W ith
direct loading the base area (boot) has to be kept clean. D anger of buckets
being torn off.
Scoop Loading D irect Loading D irect Loading
close pitch buckets
(continuous buckets)
The discharging of bucket contents can be done by gravitational or centrifugal
m eans. It depends on the speed and the pulley diam eter. W hen running
around the pulley, the resulting force gravitational and centrifugal alter in size
and direction but Pole P stays the sam e for each bucket position.
Centrifugal Discharge
W ith high speeds and light flow ing loads or coarse granulated, hard m aterials.
Gravitational Discharge
W ith low speeds, heavy loads w ith large lum ps or light dusty m aterials
15.3
Bucket Elevators
Loading
Discharging
g 895 v
*
60
l = = ( m ) n = ( R .P.M . )
4
*

2
*
n
2
n
2
*
D
l < r
i
C entrifugal D ischarge.
The pole lies w ithin the disc. B ucket w ith large opening is necessary.
The centrifugal discharge only applies w hen speeds are > 1.2 m /s.
l > r
a
G ravitational D ischarge.
The pole lies outside the bucket brim . The m aterial slides dow n over
the inner w all of the bucket.
G
S
e
B
r
s
r
i
r
a
l
Ple P
Speed
Pulley D iam eter H igh Low
(m m ) n (R .P.M .) v (m /s) n (R .P.M .) v (m /s)
300 54 0.84 27 0.42
400 50 1.05 25 0.52
500 50 1.31 25 0.66
630 51 1.68 25 0.84
800 50 2.09 25 1.05
1000 50 2.62 25 1.31
1200 53 3.35
1400 57 4.19
1600 50 4.19
r
i
= inner radius
r
s
= centre of gravity radius
r
a
= outer radius
l = pole distance
Pole P
The bucket pitch depends on the speed, the bucket geom etry, the type of
loading and discharge. W ith gravitational discharge, the bucket pitch can
be sm all. The m aterial runs over the back of the preceding bucket.
W ith the centrifugal discharge or gravitational discharge w ith staggered
row s of buckets, the pitch has to be greater.
2 to 4 buckets are positioned on half of the pulley circum ference.
The belt w idth is determ ined by the bucket w idth.
U
is determ ined from the sum of resistances to m otion.
The m ain resistance is derived from the capacity and the height.
15.4
Bucket Elevators
B ucket Pitch
B elt W idth
Peripheral Force F
U
M ain R esistances F
H
a ca. bucket height h
B
( m m )
0.5
*

*
D
a = ( m )
2 to 4
G ravitational D ischarge C entrifugal D ischarge
v > 1.2 m /s
C entrifugal D ischarge
w ith staggered row s of
buckets
B b
B
+ ( 30 to 100 ) ( m m )
U sual belt w idths B (m m )
150 200 250 300 400 500 550
650 800 1000 1250 1500 1600
F
U
= F
H
+ F
B
+ F
N
( N )
Q
m *
g
*
H
F
H
= ( N )
3.6
*
v
Q
m
( t/h ) C apacity
H ( m ) H eight of Elevation
v ( m /s ) Speed
g ( m /s
2
) A cceleration due to gravity ( 9.81 )
B ucket Pitch
G ravitational D ischarge
B ucket Pitch
C entrifugal D ischarge
15.5
Bucket Elevators
The m ethod of bucket loading and the force required to accelerate the load to
conveying speed determ ines the loading resistance. F
B
is dependent upon
the speed. The loading resistance can be accounted for w ith sufficient accur-
acy using an additional height factor.
The follow ing additional height factor values can be taken according to m ate-
rial and speed.
The secondary resistance F
N
takes into account the frictional forces, flex resi-
stances of the belt, pulley bearing resistance and acceleration to the circum -
ferential speed of the drive pulley. F
N
is very sm all by com parison to the other
resistances and is adequately covered by the factor c
N
as part of the total
resistances.
The determ ination of F
U
including consideration of individual resistances: see
Page 15.10.
P
N
from standard range.
Loading R esistance F
B
Secondary R esistance F
N
Peripheral Force F
U
Installed Pow er
Q
m *
g
*
H
0
F
B
= ( N )
3.6
*
v
Type of m aterial (t/m
3
) H
0
(m )
D ry and pow dery < 1 4
*
v + 1.5
flour, rice, grain, cem ent
Fine grained 1 - 1.5 4
*
v + 4
sand, salt, sugar
C oarse grained up to 1.5 - 1.8 6
*
v + 4
approx. 50 m m
gravel, coal, lim estone
R ough of sticky > 1.8 6
*
v + 6
C lay, earth, broken stone
F
N
= ( c
N
- 1 )
*
( F
H
+ F
B
) ( N ) c
N
1.1 for bucket elevators
Q
m *
g
*
( H + H
0
)
F
U
= c
N *
( N )
3.6
*
v
Q
m
( t/h ) C apacity
H ( m ) Elevating height
H
0
( m ) A dditional height (see table)
c
N
( - ) Factor for secondary resistances
v ( m /s ) Speed
F
U *
v P
T
P
T
= ( kW ) P
M
= ( kW )
1000
D rive Pow er at Pulley M otor Pow er
( - ) D egree of efficiency (in general 0.5 - 0.95)
15.6
Bucket Elevators
The couplings need to be adjusted to the nom inal values.
From the preceding calculations, the bucket capacity, the bucket w idth and
thus the belt w idth can be determ ined. For further calculations especially that
for belt safety factor, the belt type has to be assessed as w ell as the w eight
of the take-up (tension) pulley.
For the assessm ent of a belt type, initially the belt stress T
1
can be approxi-
m ately estim ated.
If T
v
0 then T
v
stays at 0, an additional pretension is not necessary.
Start-up Factor k
A
Values for k
Determination of Belt Type
N om inal B elt Strength
B elt Type A ssessm ent
P
N
k
A
= k
*
( - )
P
M
Type of drive k
Squirrel cage, full voltage starting 2.2
D rive w ith fluid coupling 1.4 - 1.6
Slip ring m otor 1.25
T
1 *
S
k
N
= ( N /m m )
B
S ( - ) Safety Factor
S = 10 up to 60 C
S = 12 up to 80 C
S = 15 up to 150 C
T
1
= F
U
+ F
St
+ T
v
+ T
T
( N )
Q
m *
( H + H
0
)
F
U
= 3
*
( N )
v
F
St
= H
*
9.81
*
( m
B
+ m
G
) ( N )
T
v
= c
2 *
k
A *
F
U
- F
St
- T
T
( N )
T
T
= G
T *
9.81 / 2 ( N )
Tension T
1
Peripheral Force
Slope R esistance
Pre-Tension
W eight of Take-up Pulley
m
B
( kg/m ) W eight of bucket and fastenings
m
G
( kg/m ) B elt w eight estim ated depending on bulk density
B ulk D ensity W eight of B elt
(t/m
3
) m
G
(kg/m )
1 18.5
*
B
1 - 1.8 11.5
*
B
> 1.8 15
*
B
k
A
( N ) Start-up factor estim ated
P 30 kW direct on line k
A
= 1.8 - 2.2
P > 30 kW coupled k
A
= k
*
P
N
/ P
M
(m ax 2.5)
depending on coupling k = 1.2 - 1.6
c
2
( - ) D rive factor, see A ppendix
A
= + 0.05
= 180
G
T
( kg ) W eight of take-up pulley can be ascertained from the table or obtained from
exact data if available
15.7
Bucket Elevators
O nce the belt type has been established, a back calculation can be done and
safety factors catered for.
A fter the belt nom inal tension has been determ ined, a belt type can be selec-
ted and the factor of safety checked.
The necessary pre-tension for the pow er transm ission is produced by the belt
w eight, the bucket w eight (em pty), the w eight of the take-up pulley and pos-
sibly additional tension by screw take-up or take-up w eight.
If T
v
is > 0 then this is additional pre-tension.
For a frictional cut off of pow er transm ission the follow ing criteria according
to the Eytelw ein form ula have to be fulfilled.
W eight G
T
(kg) of
Take-up Pulley
Belt Tensions T
1
and T
2
Pow er Transm ission
Pulley W idth
(m m )
Pulley D iam eter (m m )
315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250
125 16 20 27 35 45 70 110
160 20 25 35 45 60 80 135
250 25 30 45 55 80 115 175
350 40 45 70 90 125 180 270
450 42 60 75 115 160 230 310
550 50 70 80 130 190 300 360
650 55 75 95 150 210 350 420
850 65 90 115 180 250 450 550
1000 80 100 140 200 300 540 680
1250 100 115 160 230 350 670 840
1400 110 125 175 260 370 750 959
T
1
= F
U
+ F
St
+ T
v
+ T
T
( N )
T
A 1
= F
A
+ F
St
+ T
v
+ T
T
( N )
T
2
= T
A 2
= F
St
+ T
v
+ T
T
( N )
G
T *
9.81
T
v
= c
2 *
F
U
F
St
( N )
2
2
*
T
v
G
S
= ( N )
9.81
T
1
T
A 1
e
A

T
2
T
2
( - ) Friction factor drive pulley
A
( - ) Friction factor at start-up
A
= + 0.05
G
s
T
v
T
v
T
v T
v
T
1
T
2 F
U
F
N
F
H
F
St
F
St
A
r
c
w
i
t
h
o
u
t
e
f
f
e
c
t
o
n
t
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
E
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
A
r
c
o
f
t
r
a
n
s
m
i
s
s
i
o
n
A dditional pre-tension
Take-up w eight
15.8
Bucket Elevators
A fter the calculation T
1
and T
A 1
, the safety factor w hilst running and at start-
up can be checked.
The hole punching can be estim ated depending on the choice of S or by
subtracting the hole cross section from the belt w idth B .
Safety Factor
Values for e
if = 180
Friction Value
B B
S
B
k
N *
S
A
k
N *
T
1
T
A 1
Safety running state Safety at start-up
Values for S
B
W orking Tem perature (C )
60 80 120 140
B ucket Textile 8 10
Vulcanised to belt Steel cord 8 8
H ole punched Textile 10 12 14 15
according to D IN Steel cord 9 to 10
0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45
e
1.37 1.60 1.87 2.19 2.56 4.00 3.52 4.11

Pulley C age Pulley D rive Pulley
Surface B are Lagged
B A B A B A
W et - - 0.10 0.15 0.25 0.35
D am p 0.10 0.15 0.15 0.25 0.30 0.40
D ry 0.15 0.25 0.20 0.30 0.35 0.45
B = R unning
A = Start-up
15.9
Bucket Elevators
The calculation thus far is based upon the work dependent belt tension.
U nder certain circum stances it is the load dependent tension that determ i-
nes the m axim um tension T for the loaded state at rest:
The higher value of T
1
is the determ ining factor for belt safety and belt type.
Belt Tension T
1
Values for Pulley D iam eter
Table for N um ber of Plies
Q
m
G
T *
g
T
1
= H
*
g
*
( + m
G
+ m
B
) + + T
v
( N )
3.6
*
v 2
N um ber B elt Type Pulley
of plies SU PER FO R T D iam eter
(m m )
S 315/3 315
S 400/3 315
3 S 500/3 400
S 630/3 400
S 400/4 500
S 500/4 500
4 S 630/4 630
S 800/4 630
S 1000/4 800
S 1250/4 800
N um ber B elt Type Pulley
of plies SU PER FO R T D iam eter
(m m )
S 630/5 630
S 800/5 800
5 S 1000/5 1000
S 1250/5 1000
S 1600/5 1200
S 1000/6 1000
6 S 1250/6 1200
S 1600/6 1400
Load B ucket w idth (m m )
Ply
B ulk D ensity
type
(t/m
3
)
Lum p size (m m ) 100 125 160 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000
1 t/m
3
light flow inge EP 100
grain, fertilizer 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 EP 125
oil seed EP 160
= 1 - 1.5 t/m
3
0 - 30 m m 3 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 6 6
0 - 60 m m 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 EP 160
0 - 100 m m 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 EP 200
1.5 t/m
3
0 - 30 m m 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6
0 - 60 m m 4 5 5 6 6 6 6 EP 200
0 - 80 m m 4 5 6 6 6 6 6 EP 250
1) for k
N
< 60% , 1 diam eter sm aller
2) take-up pulley 1 diam eter sm aller
W hen installing the buckets a slightly convex arc should be form ed. B ucket
attachm ent using flat iron strips should be segm ented. For spacing see
A ppendix.
D epending on type of bucket attachm ent and the pull through strength of the
bolts, additional num bers of plies m ay be required.
15.10
Bucket Elevators
U
can also be derived from the individual resistan-
ces.
Peripheral Force F
U
Specific Scooping Factor W
S
F
U
= F
H
+ F
A w
+ F
S
+ F
B A
+ F
B U
( N )
H
*
Q
m *
g
F
H
= ( N )
3.6
*
v
Q
m
F
A w
=
*
( v
1
+ v )
*
g ( N )
3.6
Q
m *
g
F
S
= f
k *
w
s *
( N )
3.6
T
1
+ T
2
d
F
B A
= 2
*
x
*
( 2
*
y
*
B + )
* *
g ( N )
g D
T
v
d
F
B U
= 4
*
x
*
( y
*
B + )
* *
g ( N )
g D
v (m /s)
w
s
(
k
p
m
/
k
p
)
D ensity Lum p size
C urve Load (t/m
3
) (m m )
1 Portland cem ent 1.2 ~ 0.05
2 G rain 0.74 2 to 5
3 Sand, G ravel 1.50 2 to 10
4 C em ent, clinker 1.25 5 to 20
5 B itum inous coal 0.75 18 to 30
Lift resistance F
U
Loading resistance F
A w
D redging resistance F
S
B ending R esistance F
B A
at drive pulley
B ending R esistance F
B U
at take-up pulley
v
1
( m /s ) average loading speed
f
k
( - ) reduction factor depending on relative bucket spacing (see table)
w
s
( - ) specific scooping factor depending on v and type of m aterial (see table)
x ( - ) factor x = 0.09 for textile belts
x = 0.12 for ST belts
y ( - ) factor y = 14 for textile belts
y = 20 for ST belts
D ( cm ) pulley diam eter
d ( cm ) belt thickness
15.11
Bucket Elevators
The reduction factor or scooping factor depends on the relative bucket
sequence t
F
.
R eduction Factor f
k
a
t
F
= 0.224
*
( s )
e
B *
v
a ( m m ) bucket spacing
e
B
( m m ) bucket discharge
v ( m /s ) speed
R eduction factor f
k
R
e
d
u
c
t
i
o
n

f
a
c
t
o
r

f
k
Values for fill factor, bulk density and conveying speed.
R ecom m ended
Load B ulk Fill m axim um
D ensity Factor speed
p (t/m
3
)

v (m /s)
A sh (slag) 0.9 0.7 2.5
B arley 0.7 0.8 2.0
B asalt 3.0 0.5 1.0
B asalt lava 2.8 0.5 1.2
B eets 0.65 0.5 2.0
B last furnace
slag - ground 0.7 0.8 2.7
B last furnace slag 1.5 0.5 2.0
B riquette 1.0 0.5 1.8
B row n coal 0.7 0.5 1.9
C em ent 1.2 0.8 2.5
C harcoal 0.3 0.6 2.5
C lay 2.0 0.7 1.8
C oal dust 0.7 0.7 2.7
C oke 0.4 0.6 2.5
C rushed coal 0.8 0.8 2.6
Earth 1.7 0.7 2.4
Fly ash 1.0 0.8 2.8
G ranite 2.6 0.5 1.3
G ravel w et 2.0 0.7 2.5
G ravel dry 1.7 0.7 2.5
G ypsum 1.3 0.8 2.7
Lim e 0.9 0.8 2.5
Lim estone 2.6 0.5 1.2
Loam m oist 2.0 0.4 1.8
Loam dry 1.6 0.7 2.0
R ecom m ended
Load B ulk Fill m axim um
D ensity Factor speed
p (t/m
3
)

v (m /s)
Lum p coal 0.9 0.5 1.5
M alt 0.55 0.7 3.0
M arble 2.7 0.5 1.2
M ortar C em ent 2.0 0.7 2.0
M ortar G ypsum 1.2 0.7 2.0
M ortar Lim e 1.7 0.7 2.0
M oulding sand 1.2 0.8 2.5
O ats 0.55 0.8 3.0
Potatoes 0.75 0.6 2.0
Pulses 0.85 0.7 2.9
Pum ice 1.2 0.5 1.8
Pum ice ground 0.7 0.7 2.7
R aw flour 1.0 0.8 3.5
R ye 0.7 0.8 3.0
Sand dry 1.6 0.7 2.5
Sand w et 2.1 0.4 2.5
Saw dust 0.25 0.8 3.0
Shell lim estone 2.6 0.7 1.4
Slag coal 1.0 0.5 2.0
Slate 2.7 0.5 1.2
Sugar 0.7 0.8 2.7
Sugar beet chopped 0.3 0.7 3.0
Super phosphate 0.8 0.8 2.5
Volcanic lim estone 2.0 0.5 1.6
W heat 0.75 0.7 3.0
15.12
Bucket Elevators
Bucket According to DIN
Flat buckets to DIN 15231 for light materials such as flour, semolina.
W idth b
B
Projection H eight W eight of B ucket in kg w ith B ucket
(m m ) e
B
(m m ) h
B
(m m ) steelsheet Thickness in m m capacity
v
B
in litres
0.88 1 1.5 2 3 4
80 75 67 0.13 0.15 0.1
100 90 80 0.20 0.22 0.33 0.16
125 106 95 0.28 0.32 0.48 0.64 0.28
160 125 112 0.48 0.70 0.96 0.5
200 140 125 0.65 0.95 1.30 1.90 0.8
250 160 140 0.86 1.30 1.75 2.60 1.25
315 180 160 1.80 2.40 3.60 4.80 2.0
400 200 180 3.25 4.90 6.50 3.15
500 224 200 6.60 8.80 5.0--
Flat rounded buckets to DIN 15232 for light granular materials such as grain.
W idth b
B
(m m ) e
B
(m m ) h
B
v
B
in litres
0.88 1 1.5 2 3 4
80 75 80 0.14 0.16 0.17
100 90 95 0.21 0.24 0.36 0.3
125 106 112 0.30 0.34 0.51 0.68 0.53
160 125 132 0.50 0.75 1.00 0.9
200 140 150 0.68 1.02 1.40 2.10 1.4
250 160 170 0.94 1.40 1.90 2.80 2.24
315 180 190 1.95 2.60 3.85 5.20 3.55
400 200 212 3.55 5.30 7.10 5.6
500 224 236 7.20 9.60 9
Medium deep buckets to DIN 15233 for sticky material such as sugar cane.
W idth b
B
(m m ) e
B
(m m ) h
B
v
B
in litres
2 3 4 5 6 8
160 140 160 1.23 1.86 0.95
200 160 180 1.66 2.57 3.46 1.5
250 180 200 2.24 3.36 4.48 2.36
315 200 224 4.56 6.08 7.85 3.75
400 224 250 6.06 8.15 10.3 6
500 250 280 11.5 14.4 9.5
630 280 315 16.1 20.2 24.3 15
800 315 355 27.5 33.3 44.3 23.6
1000 355 400 38.2 46.0 61.2 37.5
Deep buckets with curved rear wall to DIN 15235 for light flowing or rolling materials
such as fly ash, potatoes.
W idth b
B
(m m ) e
B
(m m ) h
B
v
B
in litres
2 3 4 5 6 8
160 140 200 1.51 2.28 1.5
200 160 224 2.04 3.07 4.15 2.36
250 180 250 2.74 4.14 5.56 3.75
315 200 280 5.59 7.41 9.46 6
400 224 315 7.72 10.4 13.0 9.5
500 250 355 14.1 17.7 21.4 15
630 280 400 19.2 24.1 29.0 23.6
800 315 450 32.5 39.3 37.5
1000 355 500 44.5 53.5 71.2 60
Deep buckets flat rear wall to DIN 15234 for heavy pulverized to coarse materials
such as sand, cement, coal.
W idth b
B
(m m ) e
B
(m m ) h
B
v
B
in litres
2 3 4 5 6 8
160 (125) 160 1.17 1.78 1.2
140 180 1.38 2.08 1.5
200 (140) 180 1.59 2.41 3.24 1.9
160 200 1.85 2.80 3.76 2.36
250 (160) 200 2.15 3.26 4.37 3
180 224 2.49 3.77 4.96 3.75
315 (180) 224 4.44 5.95 7.72 4.75
200 250 5.09 6.82 8.59 6
400 224 280 7.03 9.40 11.8 9.5
500 250 315 12.8 16.1 19.4 15
630 280 355 17.6 22.1 26.6 23.6
800 315 400 30.6 36.9 49.6 37.5
1000 355 450 42.0 50.3 67.0 60
h
B
e
B
D IN 15231
h
B
e
B
D IN 15232
h
B
e
B
D IN 15233
h
B
e
B
D IN 15234
h
B
e
B
D IN 15235
e
B
h
B
D IN 15231
e
B
h
B
D IN 15232
e
B
h
B
D IN 15233
e
B
h
B
D IN 15234
e
B
h
B
D IN 15235
Bucket Attachment
Endless J oint
15.13
Bucket Elevators
The bucket m ade of steel, plastic or rubber m ay be bolted to the belt. The
principal factor to consider is resistance the belt carcase has to bolt pull
through.
In addition to this m ost com m only used m ethod of attachm ent, there are a
num ber of special, partly patented possibilities such as attachm ent to rear
bolt m ouldings, vulcanized on rubber plies or flexible steel plate.
O ften to prevent dirt penetration and thereby reduce w ear, soft rubber pads
are fitted betw een belt and bucket.
Elevator belts can be m ade endless by the follow ing m ethods.
Hot vulcanized splice
Bolted lap joint
Bolted on butt strap
This m ethod of joining is preferred on fast m oving elevators for instance if
the velocity is greater than 3 m /s. The plies of the butt strap should be step-
ped dow n.
Angle joint
This type is the sim plest and m ost cost effective but cannot be used in all
cases. The pulley diam eter and the bending zone of the belt around the
angle, have to be taken into consideration.
B olted on butt strap
b
u
t
t

s
t
r
a
p
B ucket
B elt
d d
C
r
b
d
n n
i
A .1
Theoretical VolumeStream Q
v
(m
3
/h)
B elt W idth Surcharge A ngle Volum e Steam B elt W idth Surcharge A ngle Volum e Stream
B (m m ) Q
V
(m
3
/h) B (m m ) Q
V
(m
3
/h)
300
5 4
1200
5 84
10 8 10 168
15 11 15 256
20 16 20 347
400
5 8
1400
5 115
10 15 10 232
15 23 15 353
20 31 20 479
500
5 12
1600
5 152
10 25 10 306
15 38 15 465
20 52 20 632
650
5 22
1800
5 194
10 45 10 391
15 68 15 594
20 93 20 807
800
5 35
2000
5 240
10 71 10 486
15 108 15 738
20 147 20 1003
1000
5 57
2200
5 300
10 114 10 604
15 174 15 916
20 236 20 1245
Flat Carrying Idlers
v = 1 m /s
inclination = 0
2 Roll Troughing Idlers
v = 1 m /s
inclination = 0
B elt W idth Surcharge A ngle Troughing A ngle
B (m m ) 20 30 35 40 45
300
0 14 18 20 21
10 20 24 26 26
15 24 27 28 28
20 28 30 31 31
400
0 28 37 40 42
10 41 48 51 51
15 48 55 56 56
20 55 61 62 61
500
0 46 62 67 70
10 68 81 85 86
15 80 91 93 93
20 92 101 103 101
650
0 82 111 121 126 129
10 122 145 151 153 151
15 143 163 167 167 163
20 165 181 184 182 176
800
0 129 174 190 198 202
10 192 228 238 240 238
15 225 255 262 262 256
20 259 285 288 285 275
1000
0 208 201 305 320 325
10 309 367 382 387 382
15 362 412 422 422 412
20 485 459 464 459 443
1200
0 306 413 449 469 477
10 455 539 561 568 561
15 532 605 620 620 605
20 613 673 681 673 650
1400
0 423 570 619 648 659
10 628 744 775 785 775
15 735 835 856 855 835
20 846 930 941 930 899
1600
0 558 752 817 856 869
10 829 982 1022 1036 1022
15 970 1102 1129 1129 1102
20 1117 1227 1242 1227 1186
1800
0 712 960 1042 1092 1109
10 1058 1253 1305 1321 1305
15 1237 1406 1441 1441 1406
20 1425 1566 1584 1566 1513
2000
0 885 1193 1295 1356 1378
10 1314 1557 1621 1642 1621
15 1537 1747 1790 1790 1747
20 1771 1945 1968 1945 1880
2200
0 1099 1401 1608 1604 1711
10 1632 1934 2013 2039 2013
15 1909 2169 2223 2223 2169
20 2199 2415 2444 2415 2334
b
B
b
B
A .2
v
(m
3
/h)
3 Roll Troughing Idlers
v = 1 m /s
inclination = 0
B (m m ) 20 30 35 40 45
400
0 21 30 34
10 35 43 47
15 42 50 53
20 50 57 60
500
0 36 51 58
10 59 73 79
15 72 84 90
20 85 97 102
650
0 67 95 108 118 127
10 109 134 145 153 159
15 131 155 165 176 176
20 155 176 184 190 193
800
0 105 149 168 185 198
10 171 210 227 240 249
15 206 243 257 268 276
20 243 276 289 299 303
1000
0 173 246 278 304 326
10 280 344 370 391 407
15 336 396 419 436 448
20 394 449 469 484 492
1200
0 253 360 406 445 477
10 411 505 543 573 596
15 493 580 614 640 658
20 578 659 688 709 722
1400
0 355 504 567 622 666
10 572 703 755 797 828
15 685 806 852 888 912
20 803 915 954 984 1001
1600
0 472 669 753 825 883
10 758 931 1000 1055 1096
15 906 1067 1128 1175 1207
20 1062 1209 1263 1301 1323
1800
0 605 858 965 1057 1131
10 969 1194 1279 1350 1402
15 1159 1364 1443 1502 1543
20 1357 1546 1614 1662 1690
2000
0 750 1064 1197 1311 1404
10 1204 1478 1588 1675 1741
15 1439 1694 1791 1865 1916
20 1685 1919 2003 2064 2099
2200
0 948 1343 1509 1650 1765
10 1509 1855 1990 2099 2178
15 1801 2121 2241 2332 2393
20 2107 2399 2503 2576 2618
b
l
l1
A .3
v
(m
3
/h)
Deep Trough
l < l
1
v = 1 m /s
inclination = 0
Garland Idlers
l = l
1
= l
2
v = 1 m /s
inclination = 0
B (m m ) 20 30 35 40 45
1000
0 196 275 307 333 352
10 301 369 394 413 424
15 356 417 440 454 462
20 413 469 487 498 501
1200
0 286 401 449 487 516
10 441 540 577 605 623
15 521 612 644 666 678
20 605 687 714 731 737
1400
0 393 552 617 670 711
10 606 743 795 834 859
15 717 843 888 919 936
20 834 947 985 1008 1017
1600
0 512 720 806 877 932
10 794 974 1043 1095 1131
15 941 1107 1166 1209 1234
20 1095 1245 1295 1328 1342
1800
0 651 917 1026 1117 1188
10 1012 1242 1330 1396 1442
15 1199 1410 1487 1541 1574
20 1396 1587 1652 1693 1712
2000
0 807 1136 1272 1384 1473
10 1255 1540 1649 1732 1789
15 1488 1750 1845 1913 1954
20 1732 1970 2050 2103 2127
2200
0 1012 1423 1591 1731 1839
10 1567 1922 2057 2159 2228
15 1856 2182 2299 2382 2431
20 2158 2454 2552 2615 2643
B (m m ) 25/55 30/60
800
0 210
10 260
15 286
20 313
1000
0 345 349
10 425 427
15 467 468
20 510 510
1200
0 504 516
10 623 630
15 684 689
20 749 751
1400
0 702 722
10 864 876
15 948 957
20 1036 1041
1600
0 915 947
10 1132 1153
15 1244 1260
20 1362 1371
1800
0 1174 1218
10 1449 1476
15 1592 1609
20 1741 1749
2000
0 1466 1527
10 1806 1846
15 1982 2011
20 2167 2185
2200
0 1838 1868
10 2255 2252
15 2472 2452
20 2699 2661
b l
B
l
1
= 60
= 30
l
b
B
A .4
v
(m
3
/h)
Box Section Belt
v = 1 m /s
inclination = 0
C onveying of Sinter
B elt W idth Surcharge A ngle Edge Zone h (m m )
B (m m ) 100 125 150
800
0 151 169 187
10 208 216 226
15 237 241 244
20 266 266 266
1000
0 201 234 262
10 302 320 334
15 362 367 378
20 410 417 421
1200
0 252 295 338
10 410 435 464
15 489 511 532
20 576 590 601
1400
0 302 360 414
10 529 568 604
15 648 676 705
20 774 792 810
1600
0 352 421 489
10 662 709 756
15 824 860 896
20 993 1015 1040
1800
0 403 482 565
10 806 860 921
15 1018 1058 1105
20 1238 1267 1299
= 80 - 90
h
b
h
1

A .5
v
(m
3
/h)
Steep Conveying Belts
B eldtW idth Surcharge A ngle C H EVR O N Q
v
H IG H C H EVR O N Q
v
B (m m ) 16 m m (m
3
/h) 32 m m (m
3
/h)
0 25
5 33
400 10 C 330/14 40
15 49
20 58
0 25
5 33
400 10 C 390/15Z 40
15 49
20 58
0 43 48
5 56 63
500 10 C 430/16 68 H C 450/32 78
15 85 94
20 100 110
0 65 42
5 86 57
600 10 C 530/16 106 H C 450/32 72
15 128 88
20 151 105
0 65 42
5 86 57
650 10 C 530/16 106 H C 450/32 72
15 128 88
20 151 105
0 88
5 115
650 10 H C 600/32 141
15 160
20 189
0 97 78
5 129 105
800 10 C 650/16 160 H C 600/32 132
15 193 160
20 227 189
0 149 149
5 196 196
1000 10 C 800/16 244 H C 1000/32 244
15 293 293
20 345 345
0 235 235
5 307 307
1200 10 C 1000/16 384 H C 1000/32 384
15 461 461
20 542 542
0 348
5 454
1400 10 H C 1200/32 562
15 673
20 789
0 326
5 432
1600 10 H C 1200/32 541
15 652
20 769
W ith sticky m aterials, a surcharge angle ca.5 higher than that for sm ooth
surface belting can be used.
The table values are based on v = 1 m /s
20 troughing
For M ultiprof belts the values for C H EVR O N belts are valid.
C hevron Profile
C hevron Profile
N ote
333
H igh C hevron Profile
M ultiprof
A .6
v
(m
3
/h)
The table values are valid for
Speed v = 1 m /s
G radient angle = 0
Fill factor 1
Corrugated Sidewall Belting
Without Cleats
Effective Surcharge A ngle
w idth
(m m ) 0 5 10 15 20
200 25 28 32 35 38
300 38 45 52 60 67
400 50 63 76 89 103
500 63 83 103 123 145
600 76 104 133 162 194
700 88 127 166 206 249
800 101 151 202 255 310
900 113 177 242 309 379
1000 126 205 285 367 454
C orrugated Sidew all height 60 m m
w idth
(m m ) 0 5 10 15 20
200 40 43 46 49 53
300 59 66 74 81 89
400 79 92 105 118 132
500 99 119 139 159 181
600 119 147 176 206 237
700 139 177 216 257 299
800 158 209 260 313 368
900 178 242 307 374 444
1000 198 277 357 439 526
w idth
(m m ) 0 5 10 15 20
200 68 72 75 78 82
300 103 110 117 124 132
400 137 149 162 175 189
500 171 191 211 231 253
600 205 234 262 292 323
700 239 278 317 358 400
800 274 324 375 428 483
900 308 372 436 503 573
1000 342 421 501 583 670
w idth
(m m ) 0 5 10 15 20
200 126 129 132 136 139
300 189 196 203 211 218
400 252 265 277 291 304
500 315 335 355 375 397
600 378 406 435 465 496
700 441 480 519 559 602
800 504 554 606 658 714
900 567 631 696 762 832
1000 630 709 789 871 958
Effective w idth
B
H
W
B .1
Masses of Rotating Idler Rollers
Mass m
R
(kg) Idler Rollers Carrying
and Return
B elt w idth B Idler R ollers Idler R oller D iam eter
(m m )
51 63.5 88.9 108 133 159 193.7 219.1
300
flat 1.6 2.2 3.2
2 part 2.3 3.4 4.1
flat 2.0 2.7 3.9 5.6
400 2 part 2.6 3.7 4.7 6.6
3 part 2.9 4.4 5.4 7.3
flat 2.2 3.2 4.5 6.6
500 2 part 2.8 4.1 5.5 7.8
3 part 3.2 4.6 6.1 8.4
flat 4.0 5.5 8.0 10.8
650 2 part 4.7 6.3 9.0 12.1
3 part 5.4 7.0 9.8 13.1
800
flat 4.7 6.7 9.8 13.3
2 part 5.6 7.4 10.6 14.2
3 part 6.5 8.3 11.6 15.6
5 part 9.0 12.4 16.3
1000
flat 9.4 11.7 15.9 21.9
2 part 11.3 13.2 17.8 24.7
3 part 13.0 13.6 18.2 26.3
5 part 13.8 14.2 18.9 28.0
1200
flat 14.2 19.3 26.1
2 part 15.0 20.5 28.0
3 part 16.3 22.3 24.5
5 part 17.2 21.7 31.9
1400
flat 21.8 29.3
2 part 23.3 31.6
3 part 25.0 35.5
5 part 24.3 35.0
1600
flat 25.1 33.4
2 part 26.5 35.0
3 part 28.0 38.7
5 part 28.5 39.3
1800
flat 27.6 37.8
2 part 29.1 39.5
3 part 30.7 42.4
5 part 31.5 42.5
2000
flat 30.2 40.2 69.1
2 part 31.8 43.3 76.4
3 part 33.3 47.0 80.1
5 part 33.8 46.5 89.5
2200
flat 46.5 77.8 88.0
2 part 49.0 82.6 97.1
3 part 50.1 93.2 111.0
5 part 51.0 95.5 111.8
C arrying Side R ollers
Flat B elt
R eturn Idlers
B ox Section B elt
2 Part Idlers
3 Part Idlers
5 Part G arland Idlers
B .2
Masses of Rotating Idler Rollers
To m oderate the effect of im pact cushion ring idlers m ay be installed at the
loading point.
D isc idlers can be installed on the return side run to reduce the effect of dirt
build-up.
To assist tracking of the belt it is recom m ended that guide rollers be installed
at ca. 50 m intervals.
For num ber and arrangem ent of disc idlers see A ppendix M .1.
Impact Idlers
Disc Support Idlers
Mass m
R
(kg) Loading point - C arrying idler
Flat belt w ith cushion rings
3 part cushion ring troughing idlers
Flat belt w ith disc idlers
V-troughing w ith disc idlers
V-troughing - Suspended disc idlers
B eldt w idth Tube-dia R ing-dia C ushion ring idlers
(m m ) (m m ) (m m ) 1 part 3 part
1000 88.9 156 19.1 21.1
1200 108 180 30.8 32.8
1400 108 180 35.7 40.5
1600 108 180 42.2 45.0
1800 133 215 67.1 71.1
2000 133 215 73.6 77.6
2200 133 215 80.1 84.1
Mass m
R
(kg)
B elt w idth Tube-dia D isc-dia R eturn idlers
(m m ) (m m ) (m m ) 1 part 3 part
400 51.5 120 4.0 5.0
500 57.5 133 5.7 6.8
650 57.5 133 6.8 8.1
800 63.5 150 11.7 13.2
1000 63.5 150 13.0 14.5
1200 88.9 180 22.2 23.9
1400 88.9 180 24.2 25.9
1600 108.0 180 31.9 33.9
215 42.0 44.5
1800 108.0 180 34.3 36.3
215 44.9 47.3
2000 108.0 180 38.3 40.0
215 48.8 51.8
2200 133.5 215 59.8 62.8
250 73.8 76.8
C .1
Conveyor Belt Thicknesses and Weights
C arcase C arcase B elt W eight m
G
(kg/m
2
)
B elt type thickness w eight Sum of carrying and pulley side covers
(m m ) (kg/m
2
) (m m )
3 4 5 6 8 10 12
S 200/3 2.7 3.1 6.6 7.7 8.9 10.0 12.3 14.6 16.9
S 250/3 2.8 3.2 6.7 7.8 9.0 10.1 12.4 14.7 17.0
S 315/3 3.0 3.4 6.9 8.0 9.2 10.3 12.6 14.9 17.2
S 315/4 3.7 4.3 7.8 8.9 10.1 11.2 13.5 15.8 18.1
S 400/3 3.2 3.7 7.2 8.3 9.5 10.6 12.9 15.2 17.5
S 400/4 4.1 4.6 8.1 9.2 10.4 11.5 13.8 16.1 18.4
S 500/3 3.6 4.0 7.5 8.6 9.8 10.9 13.2 15.5 17.8
S 500/4 4.3 5.0 8.5 9.6 10.8 11.9 14.2 16.5 18.8
S 630/3 3.9 4.3 7.8 8.9 10.1 11.2 13.5 15.8 18.1
S 630/4 4.8 5.3 8.8 9.9 11.1 12.2 14.5 16.8 19.1
S 630/5 5.5 6.2 9.7 10.8 12.0 13.1 15.4 17.7 20.0
S 800/3 4.5 5.0 8.5 9.6 10.8 11.9 14.2 16.5 18.8
S 800/4 5.2 5.8 9.3 10.4 11.6 12.7 15.0 17.3 19.6
S 800/5 6.0 6.7 10.2 11.3 12.5 13.6 15.9 18.2 20.5
S 1000/4 6.1 6.8 10.3 11.4 12.6 13.7 16.0 18.3 20.6
S 1000/5 6.5 7.3 10.8 11.9 13.1 14.2 16.5 18.8 21.1
S 1000/6 7.3 8.1 11.6 12.7 13.9 15.0 17.3 19.6 21.9
S 1250/4 7.2 8.3 11.8 12.9 14.1 15.2 17.5 19.8 22.1
S 1250/5 7.6 8.6 12.1 13.2 14.4 15.5 17.8 20.1 22.4
S 1250/6 7.8 8.8 12.3 13.4 14.6 15.7 18.0 20.3 22.6
S 1600/4 8.7 9.4 12.9 14.0 15.2 16.3 18.6 20.9 23.2
S 1600/5 9.1 10.5 14.0 15.1 16.3 17.4 19.7 22.0 24.3
S 1600/6 9.2 10.4 13.9 15.0 16.2 17.3 19.6 21.9 24.2
S 2000/5 11.0 11.9 15.4 16.5 17.7 18.8 21.1 23.4 25.7
S 2000/6 11.0 12.7 16.2 17.3 18.5 19.6 21.9 24.2 26.5
S 2500/6 13.4 14.4 17.9 19.0 20.2 21.3 23.6 25.9 28.2
SF 250/2 1.5 1.8 5.3 6.4 7.6 8.7 11.0 13.3 15.6
SF 315/2 1.9 1.9 5.4 6.5 7.7 8.8 11.1 13.4 15.7
SF 400/3 2.5 2.9 6.4 7.5 8.7 9.8 12.1 14.4 16.7
SF 500/3 3.0 3.2 6.7 7.8 9.0 10.1 12.4 14.7 17.0
SF 500/4 3.5 4.0 7.5 8.6 9.8 10.9 13.2 15.5 17.8
SF 630/4 4.1 4.4 7.9 9.0 10.2 11.3 13.6 15.9 18.2
SF 800/4 4.6 5.4 8.9 10.0 11.2 12.3 14.6 16.9 19.2
SF 1000/4 5.3 6.1 9.6 10.7 11.9 13.0 15.3 17.6 19.9
D 160 2.3 2.7 6.2 7.3 8.5 9.6 11.9 14.2 16.5
D 200 2.7 3.1 6.6 7.7 8.9 10.0 12.3 14.6 16.9
D 250 3.0 3.6 7.1 8.2 9.4 10.5 12.8 15.1 17.4
D 315 3.2 3.7 7.2 8.3 9.5 10.6 12.9 15.2 17.5
D 400 3.7 4.3 7.8 8.9 10.1 11.2 13.5 15.8 18.1
D 500 4.1 4.7 8.2 9.3 10.5 11.6 13.9 16.2 18.5
D 630 4.5 5.0 8.5 9.6 10.8 11.9 14.2 16.5 18.8
D 800 4.8 5.5 9.0 10.1 11.3 12.4 14.7 17.0 19.3
T 315 4.0 4.8 8.3 9.4 10.6 11.7 14.0 16.3 18.6
T 400 4.4 5.3 8.8 9.9 11.1 12.2 14.5 16.8 19.1
T 500 5.0 5.9 9.4 10.5 11.7 12.8 15.1 17.4 19.7
T 630 5.5 6.5 10.0 11.1 12.3 13.4 15.7 18.0 20.3
T 800 6.0 7.2 10.7 11.8 13.0 14.1 16.4 18.7 21.0
T 1000 6.5 7.8 11.3 12.4 13.6 14.7 17.0 19.3 21.6
T 1250 7.2 8.1 11.6 12.7 13.9 15.0 17.3 19.6 21.9
F 500 3.2 5.9 9.4 10.5 11.7 12.8 15.1 17.4 19.7
F 630 3.2 6.4 9.9 11.0 12.2 13.3 15.6 17.9 20.2
F 800 4.5 8.9 12.4 13.5 14.7 15.8 18.1 20.4 22.7
F 1000 4.5 9.8 13.3 14.4 15.6 16.7 19.0 21.3 23.6
F 1250 6.0 12.5 16.0 17.1 18.3 19.4 21.7 24.0 26.3
F 1600 6.0 14.1 17.6 18.7 19.9 21.0 23.3 25.6 27.9
SUPERFORT Belts
STARFLEX belts
DUNLOFLEX belts
TRIOFLEX belts
FERROFLEX belts
W eight of 1 m m cover rubber norm al quality: 1.15 kg/m
2
.
C .2
B elt w idth B elt Type Profile C over Thickness W eight
(m m ) (m m ) (kg/m )
Type C H EVR O N
400 S 200/3 C 330/16 2 + 1 3.5
400 S 200/3 C 390/15Z 2 + 1 3.4
500 S 200/3 C 330/16 2 + 1 4.2
500 S 200/3 C 430/16 2 + 1 4.6
600 S 200/3 C 530/16 2 + 1 5.3
650 S 200/3 C 530/16 2 + 1 5.6
650 S 400/3 C 530/16 3 + 1.5 7.0
800 S 400/3 C 650/16 3 + 1.5 8.5
1000 S 400/3 C 800/16 3 + 1.5 11.2
1200 S 500/4 C 1000/16 3 + 1.5 14.2
Type H IG H -C H EVR O N
500 S 200/3 H C 450/32 2 + 1 5.6
600 S 200/3 H C 450/32 2 + 1 6.3
650 S 200/3 H C 450/32 2 + 1 6.6
650 S 200/3 H C 600/32 2 + 1 7.2
650 S 400/3 H C 450/32 3 + 1.5 8.2
800 S 400/3 H C 600/32 3 + 1.5 9.8
1000 S 500/4 H C 800/32 4 + 2 14.9
1200 S 500/4 H C 1000/32 4 + 2 17.6
1400 S 630/4 H C 1200/32 4 + 2 20.9
1600 S 630/4 H C 1200/32 4 + 2 23.2
H igh C hevron Profile
M ultiprof
Type M U LTIPR O F
B elt W idth B elt Type Profile W idth C over Thickness Total Thickness W eight
(m m ) (m m ) (m m ) (m m ) (kg/m )
550 S 200/3 500 2 + 1 5.7 4.1
650 S 200/3 500 2 + 1 5.7 4.7
800 S 400/3 650 3 + 1.5 7.7 7.6
1000 S 500/4 800 4 + 2 10.3 12.5
1200 S 500/4 800 4 + 2 10.3 15.0
* B elt thickness excluding profile
B elt Type C over D escription Total Thickness W eight
(m m ) (kg/m
2
)
S 200/3 H erringbone profile 6.4 6.6
( 3 ) + 1 m m
S 200/2 R ufftop profile 6.5 5.8
( 3.5 ) + 1 m m
Steep Conveying Belts
Profiled Belts
C hevron Profile
C hevron Profile
C .3
Slider Belting
Monoply Belts
DUNLOPLAST PVG,
Quality RS
Monoply Belts
DUNLOPLAST PVC
B elt Type C over D escription Total Thickness W eight
(m m ) (kg/m
2
)
S 200/2 G B -Standard 4.9 5.5
1.5 + 0 m m sm ooth
S 200/2 G B -Standard 6.9 6.2
3.5 + 0 m m R ufftop
S 200/2 G B -Standard 6.1 6.2
3 + 0 m m H erringbone
S 250/3 G B -Extra 5.0 5.6
1.5 + 0 m m sm ooth
S 250/3 G B -Extra 7.0 6.3
3.5 + 0 m m R ufftop
B elt w eight m
G
(kg/m
2
)
B elt Type C arcase Top and B ottom covers (m m )
Thickness
(m m ) 5 + 3 6 + 3 7 + 3 8 + 3 8 + 4 10 + 4
D LP 630 R S 4 14.85 16.25 17.65 19.05 20.45 21.85
D LP 800 R S 5 15.80 17.20 18.60 20.00 21.40 22.80
D LP 1000 R S 6 16.80 18.20 19.60 21.00 22.40 23.80
D LP 1250 R S 7 18.00 19.40 20.80 22.20 23.60 25.00
D LP 1600 R S 8 20.00 21.40 22.80 24.20 25.60 27.00
D LP 2000 R S 9 22.00 23.40 24.80 26.20 27.60 29.00
D LP 2500 R S 10 24.00 25.40 26.80 28.20 29.60 31.00
B elt Type C over Thickness C over Thickness W eight
(m m ) (m m ) (kg/m
2
)
D LP 250 PVC FD A 2 + 0 3 3.75
D LP 250 PVC FD A 2 + 1 4 5.00
D LP 315 PVC FD A 1.5 + 1.5 4 5.00
D LP 400 PVC FD A 1.5 + 1.5 5 6.25
D LP 630 PVC FD A 1.5 + 1.5 7 8.75
D LP 800 PVC FD A 2 + 2 9 11.25
D LP 1000 PVC FD A 2 + 2 11 13.75
D LP 1600 PVC FD A 3 + 3 14 17.50
D LP 2000 PVC FD A 3 + 3 15 18.75
D LP 2500 PVC FD A 3 + 3 16 20.00
D LP 250 PVC B LS 2 + 1 4 5.00
D LP 315 PVC B LS 3 + 1.5 6 7.50
D LP 400 PVC B LS 4 + 2 8 10.00
D LP 630 PVC B LS 5 + 3 11 13.75
D LP 1000 PVC B LS 2 + 2 11 13.75
D LP 315 PVC A 3 + 1.5 6 7.50
D LP 400 PVC A 4 + 2 8 10.00
D LP 630 PVC A 5 + 3 11 13.75
D LP 1000 PVC A 5 + 3 15 18.75
D LP 1600 PVC A 5 + 3 17 21.75
C .4
Form Type M easurem ents W eight
D esignation (m m ) (kg/m )
H B D
T 15/20 15 20 8 0.18
T 20/40 20 40 5 0.27
T 40/70 40 70 4 0.70
T 60/80 60 80 4 1.04
T 80/90 80 90 4 1.55
T 100/100 100 100 4 2.00
TS 50/65 50 65 7 0.88
TS 70/80 70 80 6 0.82
B 80 80 80 1.90
B 110 110 80 2.90
TB 25/11/ 36 25 36 11 0.49
TB 50/25/ 80 50 80 25 2.10
TB 75/10/ 80 75 80 10 1.83
TB 80/15/100 80 100 15 3.20
Steel Cord Belts
Type `SILVERCORD
Rubber Cleats
B elt Type C ord D iam eter B elt W eight m G (kg/m
2
)
(m m ) Sum of C arrying and Pulleyside C overs (m m )
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20
ST 500 2.7 16.4 17.5 18.6 19.8 20.9 22.0 23.1 27.6
ST 630 2.7 16.9 18.0 19.2 20.3 21.4 22.5 23.6 28.1
ST 800 3.1 18.4 19.5 20.6 21.7 22.9 24.0 25.1 29.6
ST 900 3.6 19.4 20.5 21.6 22.8 23.9 25.0 26.1 30.6
ST 1000 3.6 19.8 20.9 22.0 23.2 24.3 25.4 26.5 31.0
ST 1150 4.1 20.5 21.6 22.7 23.8 24.9 26.1 27.2 31.7
ST 1250 4.1 21.0 22.1 23.2 24.3 25.5 26.6 27.7 32.2
ST 1400 4.4 22.2 23.3 24.4 25.5 26.6 27.8 28.9 33.4
ST 1600 5.0 23.5 24.6 25.7 26.8 28.0 29.1 30.2 34.7
ST 1800 5.0 24.0 25.1 26.3 27.4 28.5 29.6 30.7 35.2
ST 2000 5.0 24.6 25.8 26.9 28.0 29.1 30.2 31.4 35.8
ST 2250 5.9 28.0 29.1 30.2 31.3 32.5 33.6 34.7 39.2
ST 2500 6.3 29.4 30.5 31.6 32.7 33.9 35.0 36.1 40.6
ST 2750 6.9 30.1 31.2 32.3 33.4 34.5 35.7 36.8 41.3
ST 3150 7.4 32.6 33.7 34.8 35.9 37.1 38.2 39.3 43.8
ST 3500 7.6 34.6 35.7 36.8 37.9 39.1 40.2 41.3 45.8
ST 3750 8.2 36.7 37.8 38.9 40.0 41.1 42.3 43.4 47.9
ST 4000 8.6 38.1 39.3 40.4 41.5 42.6 43.7 44.9 49.3
ST 4250 8.8 39.8 40.9 42.0 43.2 44.3 45.4 46.5 51.0
ST 4500 9.6 41.7 42.8 43.9 45.0 46.2 47.3 48.4 52.9
ST 4750 9.6 43.3 44.5 45.6 46.7 47.8 48.9 50.1 54.5
ST 5000 10.7 45.1 46.2 47.4 48.5 49.6 50.7 51.8 56.3
W eight 1 m m cover rubber norm al quality 1.12 kg/m
2
.
M inim um cover thickness is 5 m m each side.
Straight
T-C leat
Sloping
T-C leat
B ucket C leat
B lock C leat
D
H
B
T-C leat
D
H
B
Sloping T-C leat
H
B
B ucket C leat
D .1
Dtermination of Secondary Resistances
It is possible to obtain a close estim ate of secondary resistances from indivi-
dual com ponents.
Inertial and frictional resistances due to acceleration of material at the
loading point.
Frictional resistance on the skirt plates at the loading point area.
The length of the skirt plates should be not less than the acceleration
distance
Frictional Resistance due to belt cleaners.
For sim ple scrapers the follow ing estim ate form ula can be applied:
Secondary Resistances
Resistance F
Auf
Resistance F
Sch
Resistance F
Gr
Friction values for k
R
F
N
= F
A uf
+ F
Sch
+ F
G r
+ F
G b
+ F
Tr
( N )
Q
m
F
A uf
=
*
( v - v
0
) ( N )
3.6
v (m /s) B elt speed
v
0
(m /s) Initial velocity of m aterial in direction of belt travel
Q
m
(t/h C apacity
Q
m
2
*
l
F
Sch
=
*
( N )
330
*

*
( v + v
0
)
2
b
2
For installations w ith a norm al construction v > v
0
> 0
( - ) Friction value betw een m aterial and skirt plate
for grain 0.25
for dry coal 0.35 - 0.4
for dam p overburden 0.5 - 0.6
( t/m
3
) B ulk density
l ( m ) Length of sidew alls at loading point
b ( m ) D istance betw een skirt plates
l
m in
= v
2
- v
o
2
/ ( 2
*
g
*
)
F
G r
=
*
p
*
A ( N )
( - ) Friction factor betw een cleaner and belt
in general = 0.6 0.75
p ( N /m m
2
) Pressure betw een cleaner and belt
p = 0.03 bis 0.1 N /m m
2
A ( m m
2
) Effective contact area betw een cleaner and belt
F
G r
= k
R *
B ( N )
v
o
v
l
R acleur
Scraper Thickness
Pressure (N /m m
2
)
(m m )
norm ale leve
15 20 20 25 30
k
R
340 450 1500 1875 2250
= 0.6 for sm all piece loads
= 0.8 for heavy piece loads
k
R
( N /m ) Frictional resistance
Scraper
D .2
Determination of Secondary Resistances
Belt Bending Resistance
Pulley bearing resistancefor non-driving pulleys. These resistances like belt
bending resistances, are sm all and need be determ ined only in special cases.
Resistance F
Gb
Resistance F
Tr
T
m
d
F
G b
= c
*
B
*
( k + )
*
( N )
B D
T
m
( N ) average belt tension
d ( m m ) belt thickness
D ( m m ) pulley diam eter
c ( - ) factor for the belt
textile belts c = 0.09
steel cord belts c = 0.12
k ( N /m m ) factor for the belt
textile belts k = 14 N /m m
steel cord belts k = 20 N /m m
d
w
F
Tr
= 0.005
*
T
x *
( N )
D
d
w
( m m ) shaft diam eter of bearing seating
D ( m m ) pulley diam eter
G
T
( N ) pulley w eight bearing force
vectorial sum from both the belt tension force on the pulley and the w eight of
the rotating parts of the pulley (axle loading)
T
x
= ( T
a
+ T
b
)
2
+ G
T
2
( N ) w ith angle of w rap = 180
0.005 friction coefficient of roller bearings.
T
1
T
2
T
a
T
b
T
x G
T
G
T
T
a
T
x
T
b
T
1
T
2
E.1
Special Resistances
The special resistances occur beyond the loading point area and can be calcu-
lated individually.
Resistance caused by forward tilt of idler rollers
Frictional resistance from skirt plates beyond the loading point area
Resistance due to sideways discharge (values)
Load deflector on flat belts running horizontally.
Resistance due to trippers (values)
The resistance due to trippers can be estim ated and depends on the belt
w idth.
Special Resistances
Resistance F
s
Resistance F
Sch
Resistance F
L
Resistance F
B
D eflector
C arrying side F
so
= Z
R st *
C
*
*
cos
*
sin ( m
G
+ m
L
) ( N )
R eturn side F
su
= Z
R st *
C
*
*
cos
*
sin
*
m
G
( N )
Z
R st
( pieces ) num ber of tilted rollers on carrying and return run
C ( - ) load factor for = 30 C = 0.4
for = 45 C = 0.5
( - ) friction value betw een belt and bare roller: 0.2 - 0.7
( - ) gradient angle of the installation
( - ) tilt angle of the rollers
= 1 3 (m axim um 4)
C
*
Q
m
2
*
l
F
Sch
=
*
( N )
1316
*

*
v
2
b
2
Q
m
( t/h ) capacity
( - ) friction value betw een m aterial and skirt plate (for values see Page D 1)
( t/m
3
) bulk density
l ( m ) length of skirt plate
b ( m ) distance betw een skirt plates
C ( - ) factor for surcharge angle
= 5 C = 0.83
= 10 C = 0.70
= 15 C = 0.59
= 20 C = 0.49
B elt W idth (m m ) 500 650 - 800 1000 - 2000
F
L
(N ) 800 1500 3000 - 3500
pincem ent m ax. 4
rouleaux latral
R sistance due
au pincem ent
des rouleaux porteurs
R esistance F
B
(N )
B elt W idth (m m ) 650 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000
Fixed tripper 1500 2000 2300 3000 4000 4000 5000 5500
M oveable tripper 1500 2000 2500 4000 4500 5200 5500 6000
R esistance due
to tilted idlers
w ing idler
tilt m ax. 4
E.2
Special Resistances
Resistance from skirting material beyond the loading point area.
Resistance to motion of bunker drag-out belts
C an be determ ined according to the follow ing em pirical form ula:
Resistance F
Mf
Resistance F
Ba
Factor k
F
M f
= ( 80 to 120 )
*
l
f
( N )
l
f
( m ) length of skirting m aterial that m akes seal w ith belt
l
f
= 2
*
conveying length
F
B a
= 1000
*
k
*
B
2
*
L
B *
( N )
B ( m ) drag-out w idth, silo opening
H ( m ) m aterial height in bunker
L
B
( m ) length of out-let
( - ) continuous running = 1
up to 30 charges per hour = 1.2
over 30 charges per hour = 1.3
H (m ) 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
k 8.0 9.4 10.2 11.0 11.5 12.3 12.7 13.4 13.7 14.5 14.7
D rive
v
H
L
B
B unker or Silo
F.1
Drive Factors c
1
and c
2
1
c
1
= 1 + c
2
= 1 +
e
- 1
Factor c
1
Factor c
2
Value e
0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45
160 3.10 1.92 1.34 0.99 0.76 0.60 0.49 0.40
170 2.90 1.78 1.24 0.91 0.70 0.55 0.44 0.36
180 2.71 1.66 1.14 0.84 0.64 0.50 0.40 0.32
190 2.54 1.55 1.06 0.74 0.59 0.46 0.36 0.29
200 2.39 1.45 0.99 0.72 0.54 0.42 0.33 0.26
210 2.26 1.36 0.93 0.67 0.50 0.38 0.30 0.24
220 2.14 1.28 0.87 0.62 0.46 0.35 0.27 0.22
230 2.02 1.22 0.81 0.58 0.43 0.33 0.25 0.20
240 1.92 1.14 0.76 0.54 0.40 0.30 0.23 0.18
360 1.14 0.64 1.40 0.26 0.18 0.13 0.09 0.07
370 1.10 0.61 0.38 0.25 0.17 0.12 0.08 0.06
380 1.06 0.59 0.36 0.24 0.16 0.11 0.08 0.05
390 1.03 0.56 0.35 0.22 0.15 0.10 0.07 0.05
400 0.99 0.54 0.33 0.21 0.14 0.10 0.07 0.05
410 0.96 0.52 0.31 0.20 0.13 0.09 0.06 0.04
420 0.93 0.50 0.31 0.19 0.13 0.08 0.06 0.04
430 0.89 0.48 0.29 0.18 0.12 0.08 0.05 0.04
440 0.87 0.46 0.27 0.17 0.11 0.07 0.05 0.03
450 0.84 0.45 0.26 0.16 0.11 0.07 0.05 0.03
460 0.81 0.43 0.25 0.16 0.10 0.07 0.04 0.03
470 0.79 0.41 0.24 0.15 0.09 0.06 0.04 0.03
0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45
180 1.37 1.60 1.88 2.20 2.57 3.00 3.51 4.21
190 1.39 1.64 1.94 2.29 2.70 3.18 3.75 4.44
200 1.41 1.69 2.01 2.40 2.85 3.40 4.04 4.82
210 1.44 1.73 2.08 2.50 3.00 3.60 4.32 5.20
220 1.46 1.78 2.16 2.60 3.17 3.89 4.65 5.64
230 1.49 1.83 2.23 2.73 3.32 4.07 4.97 6.09
240 1.52 1.88 2.32 2.85 3.51 4.34 5.35 6.60
320 1.75 2.32 3.06 4.05 5.35 7.05 9.35 12.40
340 1.81 2.44 3.27 4.40 5.95 8.00 10.70 14.50
360 1.88 2.57 3.52 4.80 6.58 9.00 12.40 17.00
380 1.94 2.71 3.77 5.25 7.30 10.20 14.10 19.80
400 2.01 2.86 4.05 5.74 8.15 11.60 16.50 23.20
420 2.08 3.01 4.35 6.25 9.00 13.00 18.60 27.10
A ngle
of w rap
A ngle
of w rap
G .1
Belt Safety Factor S
The safety factor S is reduced by additional stresses w hich cannot be deter-
m ined by calculation.
W ith= the factor r
0
and r
2
the various additional stresses are determ ined.
W ith this factor the tim e-strength behaviour under dynam ic conditions is
determ ined. Low r
0
values result from favourable w orking conditions w ith
few additional stresses from the physical and chem ical characteristics of the
load, few changes of conveying elevation, infrequent stopping and starting,
regular servicing and no extrem e environm ental influences. B elts w ith plan-
ned relatively low w orking durations, can be calculated w ith low r
0
values.
This factor takes into consideration the influence of additional strains caused
by the belt flexing around pulleys, transition zones, belt turnovers and vertical
curves. The values of r
1
apply to standard dim ensioning of the pulleys and
transitions w ithout belt turnover.
This factor takes into account the peak stresses of tem porary occurrence for
instance at start-up and stopping.
Belt Safety
Steady State
N on-Steady State
R eduction r
0
R eduction r
1
R eduction r
2
Tim e-Strength B ehaviour
1
S
B
=
1 - ( r
0
+ r
1
+ r
2
)
1
S
A
=
1 - ( r
0
+ r
1
)
3,5
5,4
8
nom bre de rotations
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
R sistance dynam ique dans le tem ps
Scurit S
% de k = k c
N V N V *
Facteur c : perte de tension de rupture dans la jonction
(valeurs voir page G .2)
V
S
A
S
B
r
2
r
1
r
0
Les rductions r et les facteurs de scurit S concernantles bandes EP
sont valables pour des conditions de m anutention norm ales.
The above reductions r and safety S apply to EP belts, norm al running
conditions.
N um ber of rotations
Factor c
v
= Loss of strength at the joint
(values see Page G .2)
D ynam ic Tim e-strength
Safety S
G .2
Belt Safety Factor S
K
N V
= B reaking Strength at Joint Belt Safety Factor (DIN 22101)
Safety Factor
100%
28.5%
18.5%
12.5%
0%
r
0
= 0.715 B asic reduction for dynam ic stresses
and tim e-strength behaviour
r
1
= 0.100 R eduction due to the effect of
additional strains
r
2
= 0.060 R eduction for
tem porary peaks
(start-up, braking)
Steady state w orking
1
S =
1 - ( r
0
+ r
1
)
S
A
= 5.4
The values given are valid for a textile belt under norm al w orking conditions.
Minimum values based on joint strength, safety factor S and reduction r
N on-steady state w orking.
Start-up, braking
Tem porary occurrence
localised peak stresses
D ynam ic tim e-strength
Taking into account all
additional stresses S
m in
shall not be less than
1
S =
1 - r
0
S
m in
= 3.5
1
S =
1 - ( r
0
+ r
1
+ r
2
)
S
B
= 8
Safety factors and reductions
1
)
carcase w orking basic non-continuous m axim um stress
m aterial conditions reduction peak stresses steady-state w orking
r0 r1 Sinsta r1 r2 Ssta
B (C otton) favourable 0.691 4.8 6.7
P (Polyam ide) norm al 0.715 0.100 5.4 0.100 0.060 8.0
E (Polyester) unfavourable 0.734 6.0 9.5
favourab le 0.641 4.8 6.7
Steel C ord norm al 0.665 0.150 5.4 0.150 0.060 8.0
unfavourable 0.684 6.0 9.5
1
)W ith extraordinary favourable installation conditions (for instance untroughed belt or belt
conserving start-up conditions) low er values for r
1
and r
2
can be used. The m athem atical
inter relationship betw een the additional stresses and the values r
1
and r
2
is at present still
unknow n.
{
{
}
}
S
insta
belt safety at start-up (braking)
S
sta
belt safety running
H .1
Stress-Strain Curve
W hen w orking a conveyor belt has to undergo constant load changes and
hence constant length changes. These are catered for by the elastic characte-
ristics of the carcase and are also partly reduced by the take-up system . A s a
result of constant stress changes, a fatigue and dim inution of elasticity occurs
com pared as w ith the as m anufactured belt.
The elongation behaviour of a belt can be determ ined w ith the aid of a stress-
strain curve. The test piece is subject to a pre-tension of 0.5% of the nom inal
tensile strength of the belt. It is then subjected to a test program m of 200
load cycles of betw een 2% and 10% of the nom inal tensile strength of the
belt.
The follow ing exam ple is derived from the hysteresis loop thus obtained:
Initial Elongation 0.42% Elastic Elongation 0.88%
Perm anent Elongation 0.43% Total Elongation 1.74%
The practical stress of the belt should be w ithin these lim its.
Elastic C haracteristics
Stress-Strain C urve
L - G M ax. elongation
L - A Pre-tension elongation
L - E Elastic elongation
L - P Perm anent elongation
2%
0.5%
10%
R esults of the tests
Pre-tension
elongation
Perm anent
elongation
0.433%
Elastic elongation
0.886%
H .2
Stress-Strain Curve
The quasi elastic area rem aining above the 12% stress m eans an elongation
reserve for tem porary or local occurring over-stresses such as at start-up,
braking, edge stresses at troughing transitions, term inal pulleys, belt turnover
and pulley build-up etc.
In addition to this over elongation results in a slow destruction of the plies or
carcase structure.
Perm anent elongation bl.
Eastic elongation
el
Perm anent elongation S
m in
B

zus.
Safety Factor S
60
50
40
30
20
10
(% )
2,0
2,5
5
6
10
10 0 1 2 3 4
0 1 2 3 4 5
T B
1
T A
1
A
Stress-Strain curve for a belt w ith S
m in
= 2.5
T
1A
( N ) B elt tension at start-up
T
1B
( N ) B elt tension w orking
B
( % ) Elongation in w orking condition
A
( % ) Elongation at start-up
zus.
( % ) A dditional elongation due to additional stresses
( % ) W orking stress/breaking stress
Elastic elongation
I.1
Additional Stresses
For a flat untroughed belt w ith uniform tension distribution over its cross
section the belt safety can be calculated from the breaking or nom inal tensile
strength of the belt and the w orking tension at point x.
In reality the belt is subject to the effects of tem porary and local additional
stresses in particular at the edge region and in the belt centre w hich are cau-
sed by such as:
troughing transitions horizontal curves
convex vertical curves belt turnover
concave vertical curves
These additional stresses, positive or negative m ay give rise to
Overstrainingof belt edges and thereby a reduction of the belt safety or
Compression, that is, negative elongation; the belt com presses resulting in
arching or buckling.
W ith the help of the elastic m odulus w hich can be determ ined from the
stress-strain diagram and the follow ing relationships, the conditions at the
relevant points can be checked:
The belt safety appears thus:
Elongation
0
is the elongation under w orking tension at point x under the
stress T
x
or the safety S
x
. If additional tensions or peak tensions and there-
fore additional elongations occur the elongation increases by the value
K
at
the belt edge that is to say
M
in the centre of the belt. The total elongation
results thus:
B elt edge B elt centre
For further calculations the elongation value k
D
=E/ k
N
is introduced.
W ith the geometric relations w hich result from belt tracking are
determ ined.
W ith S
x
the actual belt stresses at point x apply.
W ith S
m in
the minimum permissible belt tension, that is to say, the dyna-
m ic tim e-strength behaviour, is considered.
W ith the elongation value k
D
the belt characteristics that is to say, the
elongation behaviour of the belt is taken into account.
B elt Safety
Elastic M odulus E
k
N *
B belt breaking strength
S = =
T
x
w orking tension
T B 1
E = = =
B
*
T E
*

k
N
k
N *
B T
x
k
N
S
x
= =
0
= = ( % )
E
*
T
x
E
*
B E
*
S
x
B elt safety Factor Elongation at w orking tension
( % ) B elt elongation
k
N
( - ) N om inal belt strength
k
D
( - ) Elongation value of the belt
k
N
ges
=
0
+
K
=
ges
=
0
-
M
0
E
*
S
m in
H ysteresis loop of a conveyor belt

under initial tension
I.2
Additional Stresses
In practice the operation as a rule is determ ined by geographical or w orking
conditions. These conditions decide the dim ensions for the belt path.
H igh belt elongations alw ays occur if the belt is troughed or turned and the
belt tension T
x
at this point is especially high for instance at discharge w ith
T
m ax
.
Therefore a check of S
m in
is recom m ended.
B uckling occurs m ostly at those points w here the belt tension T
x
is particular-
ly low for instance at the tail w hen running em pty.
A check of
m in
is recom m ended.
Values for S
m in
Edge Elongation
B uckling
Elongation Value k
D
C arcase W orking S
m in
C onditions
Textile belts favourable 3.2
norm al 3.5
unfavourable 3.7
ST-belts favourable 2.8
norm al 3.0
unfavourable 3.2
60
50
40
30
20
10
500 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
N om inal B elt R esistance k ( N /m m )
N
E
l
o
n
g
a
t
i
o
n

V
a
l
u
e

k
D
Superfort
D unloplast
Ferroflex
S
T
-b
e
lts
The elongation values of the various D unlop belt types m ay be taken from the
above diagram . They are values for the planning of an installation. In individual
cases the k
D
value of a certain belt type can differ from the values in the dia-
gram . In separate cases it is recom m ended that the advice of our engineers
be sought.
I.3
Additional Stresses
The belt edges are exam ined to m aintain S
m in
, that is to say actual belt ten-
sions present at discharge and tail.
The belt centre is checked to determ ine w hether the total elongation >0
that is no buckling of the belt is expected.
Belt Edges
Belt Centre
l
S
L
1 zulssige W erte
S
m in
= siehe Seite .
k
D *

ges
ges
=
0
+
K
0
= 1 / ( k
D *
S
B
)
s
2
*
2
1 s
K
=
*
( - )
L
2
2 3
*
B
k
D
( - ) Elongation value of belt
l ( m m ) Length of centre carrying idler
s ( m m ) Lenght of belt in contact w ith the side carrying idler roller
( - ) A rc m easurem ent =
*
/ 180
L ( m m ) Transition Length
S
B
( - ) Safety factor
at discharge w ith T
1
at tail w ith T
4
ges
=
0
-
M
0
0
= 1 / ( k
D *
S
m in
)
s
3
*
2
M
=
3
*
B
*
L
2
`
1 perm issible values
= see A ppendix I.2
S
m in
k
D *

ges
ges
=
0
+
K
0
= 1 / ( k
D *
S
B
)
s
2
*
2
1 s
K
=
*
( )
L
2
2 3
*
B
Safety Factor
Total Elongation
A verage Elongation
A dditional Elongation
Total Elongation
A verage Elongation
S
m in
( - ) Safety factor w ith the low est belt tension at discharge and tail w ith T
em pty
.
I.4
Additional Stresses
Check of Minimum Safety S
min
.
Check of Elongation i.e. Possible Buckling.
with Raised Pulley
Belt Edge
Centre of Belt
l
S
L
red
h
1 Perm issible values
S
m in
= see A ppendix I.2
k
D *

ges
ges
=
0
+
K
0
= 1 / ( k
D *
S
B
)
K
=
1
-
2
s
2
*
2
1 s
1
=
*
( )
L
2
2 3
*
B
h
*
B
*
sin l
2
2
= ( 1 )
4
*
L
red
2
B
2
h ( m m ) lift of pulley
L
red
( m m ) reduced transition length
ges
=
0
-
M
0
0
= 1 / ( k
D *
S
m in
)
M
=
1
-
2
s
2
*
2
1 s
1
=
*
( )
L
2
2 3
*
B
1 h
*
B
*
sin l
2
=
*
( 1 )
2
8 L
red
2
B
Safety Factor
Total Elongation
A verage Elongation
Total Elongation
A verage Elongation
I.5
Additional Stresses
Check on Buckling Risk.
Check on Minimum Safety S
min
.
Belt Edges
Belt Centre
l
S
R
a
ges
=
0
-
K
0
0
= 1 / ( k
D *
S
em pty
)
s
*
sin s
K
=
*
( 1 )
R
a
B
ges
=
0
-
M
0
= 1 / ( k
D *
S
B
)
s
2
sin
M
=
*
B R
a
S
m in
= see A ppendix 1.2
k
D *

ges
Total Elongation
A verage Elongation
Total Elongation
A verage Elongation
Safety Factor
I.6
Additional Stresses
min
.
Belt Edge
Belt Centre
l
S
R
e

S
m in
= see A ppendix I2
k
D *

ges
ges
=
0
+
K
0
= 1 / ( k
D *
S
B
)
s
*
sin s
K
=
*
( 1 )
R
e
B
ges
=
0
-
M
0
0
= 1 / ( k
D *
S
em pty
)
s
2
M
=
*
sin
B
*
R
e
Safety Factor
Total Elongation
A verage Elongation
Total Elongation
A verage Elongation
I.7
Additional Stresses
min
.
Horizontal Curve
Belt Edge
O uter R adius
Belt Edge
Inner R adius
L
R
R
H
R
l
Intrieur de
la courbe

S
m in
= see A ppendix I2
k
D *

ges
ges
=
0

K
0
= 1 / ( k
D *
S
B
)
l B 1
K
= + cos
R
+ ( ) cos( +
R
)
2R 2R
ges
=
0
-
K
0
1
0
=
k
D *
S
em pty
Safety Factor
Total Elongation
A verage Elongation
Total Elongation
A verage Elongation
Inside of
curve
I.8
Additional Stresses
Control of minimum safety S
min
.
The length of the turnover section can be calculated once S
x
and S
m in
are
determ ined.
M inim um Turnover length w hen buckled.
Belt Turnover
Belt Edges
Turnover Section
Belt Centre
1
S
m in
=
k
D *

ges
ges
=
x
+
K
1
x
=
k
D *
S
x
k
N *
B
S
x
=
T
x
B
2
x
= c
*
L
w
2
T
x
( N ) B elt Tension at region of turnover
T
x
= ca. T
2
at discharge
T
x
= ca. T
3
at tail
S
x
( - ) B elt safety w ith belt tension T
x
L
w
( m ) Length of turnover section
k
N
( N /m m ) N om inal strength of the belt
S
x *
S
m in
L
w
= c
*
B
*
k
D *
( m )
S
x
- S
m in
Factor c
Turnover
G uided Supported
Textile B elts 1.55 1.36
ST. B elts 1.36 1.13
c
*
B k
D
L
w
=
*
S
x *
( m )
1.4 c
V
c
V
( - ) Loss of breaking strength at the joint.
B ( m ) B elt W idth
c ( - ) Factor c (see table)
Safety Factor
Total Elongation
Elongation under W orking
Tension
Safety Factor at W orking
Stress
L
w
For transport purposes, conveyor belts are coiled on w ooden cores or drum s.
The length or w eight of the belt determ ines the size of core to use.
The roll diam eter can be calculated using the follow ing form ulae:
d
*
L
a = -
*
( D
R
+ d
k
) ( m )
D
R
- d
k
4
L
w
= a + D
k
( m )
J.1
Roll Diameter
C oiled R oll
D ouble C oiled R oll
R oll on O val C ore
S-Form C oiled R oll
C ore D iam eter dk Internal Square H ole A pplication
(m m ) (m m )
150 55
250 110
Stock belts, general
400 205 W ide and heavy belts
600 205 Steel cord belts
D
R
= 1.27
*
d
*
L + d
k
2
( m )
D
R
( m ) roll diam eter
d ( m ) belt thickness
d
k
( m ) core diam eter
L ( m ) belt length
Innenvierkant
D
R
2D
D
R
d
k
a
L
w
d
K
D
R
d
k
R
L
D
R
= 1.27
*
d
*
+ d
k
2
( m )
2
2 2
D
R
= 1.27
*
d
*
L + ( d
k
+
*
a )
2
-
*
a ( m )

d
k
D
R
( D
R
2
- d
k
2
)
L = ( m )
2
*
d
Internal H ole
J.2
Roll Diameter
Roll Diameter
in m
L B elt Thickness (m m )
(m ) 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
20 0.44 0.46 0.49 0.52 0.54 0.56 0.58 0.61
30 0.50 0.54 0.57 0.61 0.64 0.67 0.69 0.72
40 0.56 0.61 0.65 0.68 0.72 0.76 0.79 0.82
50 0.62 0.67 0.71 0.76 0.80 0.84 0.87 0.91
60 0.67 0.72 0.77 0.82 0.87 0.91 0.95 0.99
70 0.71 0.77 0.83 0.88 0.93 0.98 1.02 1.06
80 0.76 0.82 0.88 0.94 0.99 1.04 1.09 1.13
90 0.80 0.87 0.93 0.99 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20
100 0.84 0.91 0.98 1.04 1.10 1.15 1.21 1.26
120 0.91 0.99 1.06 1.14 1.20 1.26 1.32 1.38
140 0.98 1.06 1.14 1.22 1.29 1.36 1.42 1.48
160 1.04 1.13 1.22 1.30 1.38 1.45 1.52 1.58
180 1.10 1.20 1.29 1.38 1.45 1.53 1.61 1.68
200 1.16 1.26 1.36 1.45 1.53 1.61 1.69 1.76
220 1.21 1.32 1.42 1.52 1.61 1.69 1.77 1.85
240 1.26 1.38 1.48 1.58 1.68 1.76 1.85 1.93
260 1.31 1.43 1.54 1.64 1.74 1.83 1.92 2.00
280 1.36 1.48 1.60 1.71 1.81 1.90 1.99 2.08
300 1.40 1.53 1.65 1.76 1.87 1.97 2.06 2.15
320 1.45 1.58 1.71 1.82 1.93 2.03 2.13 2.22
340 1.49 1.63 1.76 1.88 1.99 2.09 2.19 2.29
360 1.53 1.68 1.81 1.93 2.05 2.15 2.26 2.36
380 1.57 1.72 1.85 1.98 2.10 2.22 2.32 2.42
400 1.61 1.77 1.90 2.03 2.15 2.27 2.38 2.48
C ore diam eter d
k
= 250 m m
Innenvierkant
D
R
d
k
Internal H ole
K.1
Pulley Diameters
The pulley diam eter in general depends upon the thickness of the carcase
(see A ppendix C ). In regions of low tension such as at the tail pulley or w ith
sm all angles of w rap such as snub pulleys (90) sm aller pulley diam eters m ay
be used.
Pulley diam eters
for belt types
SUPERFORT S
STARFLEX SF
DUNLOFLEX D
TRIOFLEX T
FERROFLEX F
CHEVRON Belts
HIGH CHEVRON Belts
Tail Pulley
Snub Pulley B end Pulley Snub Pulley
D rive Pulley
Tension Pulley
B elt Type Pulley D iam eter (m m ) B elt Type Pulley D iam eter (m m )
A B C A B C
S 200/3 250 200 160 SF 250/2 200 160 125
S 250/3 250 200 160 SF 315/2 250 200 160
S 315/3 315 250 200 SF 400/3 250 200 160
S 315/4 400 315 250 SF 500/3 315 250 200
S 400/3 315 250 200 SF 500/4 400 315 250
S 400/4 400 315 250 SF 630/4 500 400 315
S 500/3 400 315 250 SF 800/4 500 400 315
S 500/4 400 315 250 SF 1000/4 630 500 400
S 630/3 400 315 250
S 630/4 500 400 250 D 160 250 200 160
S 630/5 630 500 315 D 200 250 200 160
S 800/3 500 400 400 D 250 250 200 160
S 800/4 630 500 315 D 315 250 200 160
S 800/5 630 500 400 D 400 315 250 200
S 1000/4 630 500 400 D 500 315 250 200
S 1000/5 800 630 400 D 630 400 315 250
S 1000/6 800 630 500 D 800 500 400 315
S 1250/4 800 630 500
S 1250/5 800 630 500 T 315 315 250 200
S 1250/6 1000 800 630 T 400 400 315 250
S 1600/4 1000 800 630 T 500 500 400 315
S 1600/5 1000 800 630 T 630 630 500 400
S 1600/6 1000 800 630 T 800 800 630 500
S 2000/5 1200 1000 800 T 1250 1000 800 630
S 2500/6 1400 1200 1000
F 500 500 400 315
F 630 500 400 315
F 800 630 500 400
F 1000 630 500 400
F 1250 800 630 400
F 1600 800 630 400
B elt Type Profile D rive Pulley B end Pulley Snub Pulley
de bande (m m ) (m m ) (m m )
S 200/3 C 330/16 250 250 160
C 390/15Z 250 250 160
C 430/16 250 250 160
C 530/16 250 250 160
S 400/3 C 650/16 315 250 200
C 800/16 315 250 200
S 500/4 C 1000/16 500 400 250
B elt Type Profile D rive Pulley B end Pulley Snub Pulley
de bande (m m ) (m m ) (m m )
S 200/3 H C 450/32 315 315 200
S 400/3 H C 450/32 315 315 200
H C 600/32 315 315 200
S 500/4 H C 800/32 500 400 250
H C 1000/32 500 400 250
S 630/4 H C 1200/32 500 400 315
Tension Pulley (take-up) see Tail Pulley
K.2
Pulley Diameters
B elt Type C over Total W eight Pulley m inim um
Thick- Thick- D iam eter
ness* ness
A B C
(m m ) (m m ) (kg/m
2
) (m m ) (m m ) (m m )
D LP 250 PVC FD A 2 + 0 3 3.75 100 80 60
D LP 250 PVC FD A 2 + 1 4 5.00 100 80 60
D LP 315 PVC FD A 1.5 + 1.5 4 5.00 200 160 125
D LP 400 PVC FD A 1.5 + 1.5 5 6.25 250 200 160
D LP 630 PVC FD A 1.5 + 1.5 7 8.75 400 315 250
D LP 800 PVC FD A 2 + 2 9 11.25 500 400 315
D LP 1000 PVC FD A 2 + 2 11 13.75 500 400 315
D LP 1600 PVC FD A 3 + 3 14 17.50 630 500 400
D LP 2000 PVC FD A 3 + 3 15 18.75 800 630 500
D LP 2500 PVC FD A 3 + 3 16 20.00 1000 800 630
D LP 250 PVC B LS 2 + 1 4 5.00 160 125 100
D LP 315 PVC B LS 3 + 1.5 6 7.50 250 200 160
D LP 400 PVC B LS 4 + 2 8 10.00 315 250 200
D LP 630 PVC B LS 5 + 3 11 13.75 500 400 315
D LP 1000 PVC B LS 2 + 2 11 13.75 500 400 315
D LP 315 PVC A 3 + 1.5 6 7.50 250 200 160
D LP 400 PVC A 4 + 2 8 10.00 315 250 200
D LP 630 PVC A 5 + 3 11 13.75 500 400 315
D LP 1000 PVC A 5 + 3 15 18.75 630 500 400
D LP 1600 PVC A 5 + 3 17 21.75 800 630 500
D LP 630 R S 6 + 3 13 16.25 400 315 250
D LP 800 R S 8 + 3 16 20.00 500 400 315
D LP 1000 R S 8 + 3 18 21.00 630 500 400
D LP 1250 R S 10 + 4 21 26.25 800 630 500
D LP 1600 R S 10 + 4 23 27.00 800 630 500
D LP 2000 R S 10 + 4 25 29.00 1000 800 630
D LP 2500 R S 10 + 4 26 31.00 1000 800 630
D LP 630 D B R S 15 + 5 27 31.00 500 400 315
DUNLOPLAST DLP
PVC
RUBBER
PVC-Quality
Rubber-Quality
* Total cover thickness (including reinforcing fibre)
FDA C olour: w hite. For transport of food stuffs, m eeting International
recom m endations. R esistant to Fats, O ils and Solvents.
Tem perature range: -15 to + 80C
BLS C olour: w hite. Food quality and flam e resistant according to
International recom m endations.
Tem perature range: -15 to + 80C
A C olour: grey. N on-toxic, highly abrasion resistant, C hem ical, Fat and
oil. Tem perature range: -20 to + 80
RA H ighly abrasion resistant under norm al w orking conditions for bulk
and unit loads.
K.3
Pulley Diameters
B elt M in. C over B elt B elt M inim um
Type Thickness Thick- W eight Pulley D iam .
Top B ottom ness A B C
(m m ) (m m ) (m m ) (kg/m
2
) (m m ) (m m ) (m m )
ST 500 5 5 12.5 16.40 630 500 400
ST 630 5 5 12.5 16.92 630 500 400
ST 800 5 5 13.2 18.37 630 500 400
ST 900 5 5 13.8 19.39 630 500 400
ST 1000 5 5 13.8 19.79 630 500 400
ST 1150 5 5 13.9 20.45 630 500 400
ST 1250 5 5 13.9 20.98 630 500 400
ST 1400 5 5 14.7 22.16 800 630 500
ST 1600 5 5 15.3 23.48 800 630 500
ST 1800 5 5 15.3 24.01 800 630 500
ST 2000 5 5 15.3 24.63 800 630 500
ST 2250 5 5 16.4 27.98 1000 800 630
ST 2500 5 5 16.8 29.38 1000 800 630
ST 2750 6 6 19.0 32.29 1250 800 630
ST 3150 6 6 19.6 34.81 1250 800 630
ST 3500 7 7 22.0 39.05 1400 1000 630
ST 3750 7 7 22.4 41.14 1400 1000 630
ST 4000 7 7 22.8 42.61 1400 1000 630
ST 4250 8 8 25.6 46.51 1400 1250 800
ST 4500 8 8 26.2 48.40 1600 1400 800
ST 4750 8 8 26.6 50.05 1600 1400 1000
ST 5000 9 9 29.0 54.08 1800 1600 1000
ST 6000 9 9 30.4 60.69 2000 1800 1250
ST 7000 10 10 33.3 68.50 2250 2000 1600
Steel Cord Belts
SILVERCORD
A dditional w eight for each 1m m additional cover thickness: 1.12 kg/m
2
.
B elt thickness and belt w eight apply to belt w ith the m inim um cover thick-
ness top and bottom .
L.1
Crowned Pulleys
The tracking of conveyor belts w ill in practice be effectively achieved using
crow ned pulleys. In m ost cases for reasons of price and m anufacture, the
pulley is shaped in a cylindrical-tapered m anner.
Pulley crow n should be carefully dim ensioned to ensure belt life, w ear and
tear and w orking behaviour are not influenced determ inately.
If the taper h is too great or if b
z
is too sm all differential belt tensions result
w hich has an adverse effect on belt life.
If the belt in the taper area does not m ake full contact this w ill lead to w ear
and tear on the pulley side of the belt.
If the taper h is too great diagonal creases can appear in the belt. The track-
ing effect is reduced.
The transition from the cylindrical to the tapered part of the pulley m ust be
w ell rounded.
C row ned pulleys can also be lagged.
Em pirical determ inations:
The belt runs tow ards the slack
side.
The belt w anders tow ards the
side to w hich it first m akes
contact w ith the pulley surface.
C ylindrical M id Section b
z
Taper h
N otes
B allige Trom m el
h
b
T
h
b
z
b
k
b
k
Zylindrisch-konische Trom m el
h
b
z
B
D
Kanten
gut abrunden.
b
T
0,3 b
T *
0,3 b
T *
0,4 b
T *
D
2
D
1
D ( m m ) Pulley diam eter
h ( m m ) Taper
b
z
( m m ) W idth of cylindrical section
D
1
- D
2
D
1
f = f < 0.005
*
2 2
B elt W idth B b
z
B /b
z
(m m ) (m m )
> 300 0.4
*
B 2.5
> 300 800 0.5
*
B 2.5
> 800 0.65
*
B 1.5
Pulley D iam eter Taper h (m m )
(m m ) L < 3000 m m L > 3000 m m
B 800 m m B > 800 m m
< 200 0.5 0.5 0.7
> 200 400 1 1.25 1.5
> 400 800 1.5 2 2.5
> 800 2 2.5 3
B andablauf
C row ned Pulley
C ylindrical Tapered Pulley
Edges to be
w ell rounded
B elt
runof
Taper to ISO/DIN 5286
M .1
Arrangement of Rubber Supporting Idler Discs
R ubber supporting discs on the return side run w ill behave as a belt surface
cleaner. These idlers som etim es influence the tracking of the belt in a nega-
tive m anner.
Supporting Discs on
Return Side Run
Installation Instruction
M easurem ents
(Values)
B U ntertrum
b b b b b
c c c
a
R

D
N um ber of D iscs Tube D isc
B elt W idth B a b c each D iam . R D iam . D
(m m ) (m m ) (m m ) (ca. m m ) roller total (m m ) (m m )
end
400 425 25 108 3 8 51 120
500 530 30 137 3 8 57 133
650 680 30 140 3 9 57 133
800 890 30 130 5 14 63.5 150
1000 1090 30 122 5 16 63.5 150
1200 1305 35 128 5 17 88.9 180
1400 1505 35 136 5 18 88.9 180
180
1600 1800 40 140 6 21 108
215
180
1800 2000 40 145 6 22 108
215
180
2000 2200 40 156 7 24 108
215
B R eturn R un
C hem ical C arcase M aterial
B P E D
A cetic A cid 10% + 0 + +
A cetone + + + +
A m m onia 10% + 0 + +
B enzine + + + +
B enzol + + + +
C reosote + + +
D iesel O il + + + +
D rilling O il + + + +
Ethylacetate 0 0 + +
Form aldehyde 10% + 0 + +
Form ic A cid 10% + 0 + +
G lycerine + + + +
H ydrochloric A cid 10% + +
Latic A cid 10% + 0 + +
M achine O il + + + +
M ethylalcohol 0 + +
O il, H eavy Sw elling + + + +
O il, Light Sw elling + + + +
Phenol 10% + + +
Pine Tar + + + +
Potassium B ichrom ate 10% + 0 + +
Sulphuric A cid 10% + +
Trichloroethylene + + + +
U rea 50% + 0 + +
W ater 20C + + + +
W ater 80C + + + +
N .1
Chemical Resistance
The conveyor belt m ust not only m eet the m echanical and therm al dem ands
of the load but also be resistant to diverse chem icals. The chem icals can be
in liquid, solid form or gaseous form . In m any cases the quantity, concentra-
tion and tem perature of the substances being handled is not exactly know n
or defined.
The chem ical resistance of the belt w ill be judged by the sw elling of the
covers. A t ca. 8-10% sw elling the physical properties decline, the belt loses
its w orking capability and its life w ill be reduced.
The reaction w ill intensify through higher concentration, also w ith relatively
low tem perature, or w ith low er concentration and higher tem perature.
Resistance of the Carcase
+ = resistant 0 = lim ited resistance = not resistant
B C otton
P Polyam ide
E Polyester
D A ram id
N .2
Chemical Resistance
Resistance of the Covers
C ondition B asic M aterial
C hem ical K % C N R N B R B utyl PVC
SB R N C R
A cetic A cid 100 20 0
A cetic A cid 10 20 + + 0
A cetic A cid 10 80
A cetone 100 20 + +
A m m onia 10 20 + + + +
A niline 100 20 0 +
A xle O il 100 80 0 0
A xle O il 100 20 + +
B enzine 100 20 0 +
B enzine/B enzol 1:1 50/50 20 +
B enzol 100 20
C austic Soda 10 20 + + + +
C austic Soda 40 20 0 0 +
C hloroform 100 20
C opper Sulphate 10 20 0 0 + +
C reosote 50 20 0 0 +
C yclohexane 100 20
D etergent P3 3 20 + + + +
D etergent P3 3 80 + 0 + 0
D iesel O il 100 20 0 +
D rilling O il 2 20 0 + 0 +
D rilling O il 10 20 + +
D rilling O il 100 20 + +
Ethylacetate 100 20 0 0
Ethylalcohol 100 20 + 0 + 0
Form aldehyde 38 20 + 0 + +
Form ic A cid 10 20 + + +
Form ic A cid 100 20 0 + 0
G lycerine 100 20 + + + +
G lycerine 100 80 + + + +
H ydrochloric A cid 10 80
H ydrochloric A cid 10 20 + + + +
H ydrochloric A cid 30 80
H ydrochloric A cid 30 30 + + + +
Latic A cid 10 80 0 0
Latic A cid 10 20 + 0 + +
M achine O il 100 20 + 0 +
M achine O il 100 80 0 0
M agnesium Sulphate 10 80 + + + +
M agnesium Sulphate 10 20 + + + +
M aleic A cid 10 80 0
M aleic A cid 10 20 + 0 + 0
M ethylalcohol 100 20 + 0 + 0
M ethylene C hloride 100 20
N itro Solvent 100 20 0 0
O il H eavy Sw elling 100 20 + +
O il H eavy Sw elling 100 80 0
O il Sw elling 100 80 0
O il Sw elling 100 20 0 + +
O live O il 100 80 0 0
O live O il 100 20 + + +
O xalic A cid 10 80 + +
O xalic A cid 10 20 + + + +
N .3
Chemical Resistance
C ondition B asic M aterial
C hem ical K % C N R N B R B utyl PVC
SB R N C R
K % C oncentration in %
N R N atural R ubber
SB R Styrene B utadiene R ubber
N B R N itrile R ubber
N C R N itrile C hloroprene R ubber
B utyl B utyl R ubber
PVC Polyvinyl C hloride
Paper Pulp (dam p) Pulp 20 + 0
Paraffin O il 100 80 0 0
Paraffin O il 100 20 + +
Phenol 10 80
Phenol 10 20 0 +
Phosphoric A cid 10 20 + + + +
Phosphoric A cid 50 20 + + + +
Phosphoric A cid 10 80 + + 0
Pitch for
W ood Im pregnation 100 20
Potash 40 20 0 0 +
Potash 10 20 + + + +
Potash 10 80 0 0 +
Potash 40 80 0 0 +
Potassium D ichrom ate 10 20 + + + +
Potassium D ichrom ate 10 80 0 + + +
Potassium Perm anganate 10 20
Sea W ater 100 80 + + + +
Sea W ater 100 20 + + + +
Stearic A cid Pow der 100 20 + + + +
Stearic A cid Pow der 100 80 0 0
Sulphuric A cid 50 20
Sulphuric A cid 10 20 + + + +
Sulphuric A cid 50 80
Sulphuric A cid 10 80 +
Tallow 100 20 0 + + +
Tallow 100 80
Tetralin 100 20
Toluol 100 20
Trichloroethylene 100 20
U rea 50 20 + + + +
W ater (tap) 100 20 + + + +
W ater (tap) 100 80 + + + +
O .1
Steep Incline Conveyors
To obtain optim um perform ance from steep incline belts in the C H EVR O N
and H IG H -C H EVR O N range w ith regard to sm ooth running and w orking safe-
ty, a range of constructive m easures are recom m ended w hich have proved
them selves in practice.
The drive pulley should be rubber lagged. The belt tension w ill be less, slip at
start-up under load, prevented, and the running of the belt stabilized.
If 3 part idlers are used, the troughing angle should not be greater than 20
and w ith 2 part idlers, greater than 25 (for jute sacks etc.)
The angle of w rap on the drive pulley should not be m ore than ca. 190. The
pressure on the profile caused by the snub pulley w ould otherw ise be too
high such that the profile can be pressed through to the pulley side of the
belt. C hanges in the direction of bending of the belt are not recom m ended.
To im prove the running of the return side belt, tw o idlers w ith reduced dia-
m eter and set next to one another, can be fitted.
O n the carrying and return side run, as w ith sm ooth surface belts, standard
idlers are used. The idler pitch should not be divisible by the pitch of the
profile pattern on the belt.
A plough scraper should be fitted im m ediately before the tail pulley so that
m aterial does not get trapped betw een belt and pulley. W here there is back
flow ing w ater on the pulley side of the return belt, a w ater scraper (plough
scraper) should be used.
If w et m aterials are conveyed, w ater shedding grooved pulley lagging is
recom m ended because of the risk of off-track running. The tail pulley should
as a m inim um be one profile length behind the back of the loading chute so
that back flow ing m aterial can be re-adm itted.
The height of fall of m aterial being loaded to the belt should be kept as sm all
as possible, the loading being in direction of belt travel.
The belt m ust not sag excessively betw een idlers (pre-tension), otherw ise the
load stream becom es broken up causing loss of conveying capacity and an
increase in pow er dem and.
Hints for Installation
Improvements
1. D rive Pulley
2. Troughing A ngle
3. Snub Pulley
4. R eturn Side
5. Idler Spacing
6. D eflector
7. Tail Pulley
8. Loading H eight
9. B elt Sag
d
is
t
a
n
c
e
b
e
t
w
e
e
n
s
t
a
t
io
n
s
d
is
t
a
n
c
e
b
e
t
w
e
e
n
s
t
a
t
io
n
s
2
9
8
10
7
6
5
4
3
1
3 part Idlers 2 part Idlers
D rive
Pulley
D rive
Pulley
Tail Pulley
O .2
Steep Incline Conveyors
Steep incline belting cannot be scraped by norm al m echanical cleaning
devices. C linging and sticky m aterials w ill result in build-ups. If conditions
perm it, the belt surface beyond the discharge pulley can be hosed w ith w ater
or cleaned by com pressed air. For lum py and dry m aterials, sledge-ham m er
devices can be used w hich im pact the pulley side of the belt during rotation.
Eccentric rapping rollers that vibrate the belt can also be fitted.
10. C leaning
P.1
Endless Splice J oints
C onveyor belting can be m ade endless using the follow ing jointing m ethods:
H ot Vulcanised C old Vulcanised
W arm Vulcanised M echanical Fastener
The durability obtained from these various m ethods depends on environm en-
tal conditions, splicing m aterials and the proficiency of the splicing personnel.
The advice of the belt m anufacture should be observed particularly the spe-
cial recom m endations that apply to certain belt types and qualities.
W ith hot vulcanising, vulcanising presses are necessary. The vulcanisation
takes place under a certain pressure and depending on cover quality, at a cer-
tain tim e and tem perature. In general the vulcanising tem perature lies
betw een 140C and 155C . Vulcanisation tim es depend on the belt thickness
and are of 20 to 45 m inutes duration. W ith alm ost all belt types, the best
results are achieved by the hot vulcanisation process w ith regard to strength
and the retention of strength after prolonged periods of usage.
W ith textile belts, depending on carcase construction there are the stepped
splice m ethod (1 or m ore steps) and the finger splice m ethod.
D epending on the application one differentiates betw een the straight joint
(90 across the belt) the diagonal splice, the C hevron splice and the zig-zag
splice (for short centre to centre distances or for w eigher belts).
For Steel Cord Belts depending on tensile strength and the cord diam eter
the 1 to 4 step splice is used. W ith this the cords are laid together in a parti-
cular design.
Methods of Making Endless
H ot Vulcanisation
l
v
l
st
l
st
l
st
l
a
l
B
Stepped Splice
B
l
t
b
t
Finger Splice
B
A ngle 1640'
0,3
*
B
D iagonal Splice

C hevron Splice
a = 200 - 300 m m a 70 70 150
B
"
"
Zig-Zag Splice
1 Step 2 Step 3 Step
P.2
Endless Splice J oints
For the w arm vulcanisation m ethod, a press is likew ise required. The joint can
how ever be constructed w ith shorter overlap lengths. The vulcanisation tem -
perature lies betw een 100C to ca. 115C . For the w arm vulcanising process
special vulcanising m aterials are required.
W ith cold vulcanisation, the process takes place under am bient tem perature
conditions. The optim um strength is reached in ca. 24 hours. The quality of
the joint is very dependent upon the am bient conditions, hum idity, dustiness
etc. Expenditure on equipm ent and tim e is m uch reduced.
The quickest and m ost cost effective joint is the m echanical splice. The
strength how ever is significantly low er than that of a vulcanised splice joint.
The m echanical fastener is w ell suited for quick em ergency splicing or belt
dam age repair.
W arm Vulcanisation
C old Vulcanisation
M echanical Splice
Steel W ire H ook Fastener
H inged Fastener
B olted Plate Fastener (Flexco)
Q .1
Material Characteristics
R ecom -
M aterial B ulk Surcharge M axim um A ngle of Inclination m ended
D ensity A ngle Sm ooth height of profiles D unlop
(t/m
3
) () B elts 6 m m 16 m m 32 m m Q uality
A lum
A lum inium , coarse
A lum inium , fine
A lum inium - O xide
A lum inium - Silicate
A lum inium - Sulphate (granular)
A lum inium - Turnings
A m m onium - C hloride (crysalline)
A m m onium - N itrate
A m m onium - Sulphate, dry
A m m onium - Sulphate, granulated
A m m onium - Sulphate, w et
A nthracite C oal
A pples
A sbestos ore
A sbestos, shred
A sh, caustic salt
A sh, coal - dry 80m m and under
A sh, coal - w et 80m m and under
A sh, fly
A sh, fly coal slack
A sphalt
A sphalt, binder for m otorw ays
A sphalt, broken
A sphalt, paving
B agasse
B akelite, fine
B allast, broken
B arium carbonate
B arley
B arytes, coarse grained
B arytes, pow dered
B asalt
B asalt lava
B auxite, broken 80m m and under
B auxite, earth broken
B auxite, raw
B eans
B eet pulp
B eets
B ezonite, raw
B icarbonate
B itum inous coal, fine or nuts
B itum inous coal up to 50m m
B last furnace slag, broken
B last furnace slag, granulated, dam p
B last furnace slag, granulated, dry
B one m eal
B ones
B orax, coarse
B ran
B row n C oal briquettes
B row n C oal, dry
C alcium carbide
C alcium oxide
0.80 - 1.04
0.95 - 1.05
0.70 - 0.80
1.12 - 1.92
0.78
0.86
0.11 - 0.24
0.83
0.72
1.10
0.72 - 0.93
1.30
0.90
0.35
1.30
0.32 - 0.40
0.81
0.56 - 0.64
0.72 - 0.80
0.45 - 0.80
0.64 - 0.72
1.00 - 1.30
1.28 - 1.36
0.70
1.30
0.13
0.48 - 0.64
1.50 - 1.80
1.15
0.60 - 0.70
2.4 - 2.9
1.9 - 2.3
1.6 - 2.3
2.30
1.20 - 1.36
1.09
2.55
0.85
0.40
0.65
0.54 - 0.64
0.65
0.90 - 1.00
0.80
1.30 - 1.60
1.50
0.50 - 0.60
0.90
0.60
0.96 - 1.04
0.25 - 0.30
0.65 - 0.85
0.65 - 0.80
1.12 - 1.28
0.70
25
15
6
15
-
20
-
15
25
10
15
15
15
15
20
15
-
10
25
15
15
-
-
-
30
30
-
15
-
5
-
20
15
15
20
20
15
10
15
15
-
20
15
20
15
15
10
20
20
15
10
20
15
15
20
17
20
20
17
-
17
-
15
23
15
15
17
17
10 - 12
18
22
-
18
20
15
15
-
-
-
20
25
-
20
-
12
-
18
17
17
20
18
20
12
14
12
-
15
18 - 20
24
15 - 20
18
15
15
17
15
12
15
20
18
18
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
20
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
22
-
20
-
-
-
-
-
-
22
-
-
-
-
-
22
20
-
-
18
-
-
-
-
-
22
-
-
-
-
25
25
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
35
-
-
-
-
-
30
25
25
-
-
-
-
-
-
35
-
30
-
-
25
20
25
25
35
-
25
20
-
-
30
35
25
25
25
-
-
25
25
-
30
25
-
-
-
30
30
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
40
-
-
-
-
-
35
30
30
-
-
-
-
-
-
40
-
35
-
-
30
25
30
30
40
-
25
30
-
-
35
40
30
30
30
-
-
30
30
20
40
30
-
-
-
-
R S
-
-
-
R A
R A
-
R A
-
-
-
-
-
-
R A - R S
R A - R S
-
R A - R S
-
-
R A
R A
R A
-
-
R A
R A
-
-
R E - R S
R E - R S
R E - R S
R E - R S
-
R A
R A
-
-
R A
-
R A - B V
-
R A - R S - R A S
R A - R S - R A S
-
-
R A
R A
-
R A
R A
R A
Q .2
R ecom -
(t/m
3
0.35
1.60
0.60
2.08 - 3.20
1.20 - 1.30
1.20
2.00
1.35 - 1.45
1.10 - 1.20
0.35
0.80
2.00 - 2.24
1.28 - 1.60
1.60
1.60 - 1.80
0.96 - 1.20
2.00
1.80 - 2.00
0.95
0.95
0.06 - 0.11
0.32 - 0.40
0.55
0.50
0.55
0.45 - 0.65
0.30 - 0.45
0.40 - 0.56
0.37 - 0.56
0.56 - 0.72
0.65
0.80
2.08 - 2.40
1.76 - 2.40
1.80
2.00 - 2.20
1.92 - 2.40
1.20 - 1.36
0.40 - 0.60
0.10 - 0.20
0.20 - 0.25
0.19 - 0.24
0.60 - 0.65
0.4 - 0.5
0.35
1.20 - 1.44
1.44 - 1.60
0.69
0.40 - 0.50
1.60
1.44 - 1.60
1.60
1.12 - 1.28
2.00
1.60 - 1.76
5
10
15
20
15
10
10
15
15
15
5
10
15
15
15
15
15
15
10 - 15
20
10
-
10
5
10
5
5
20
20
20
5
15
-
-
10
15
15
15
10
15
15
10
10
20
-
-
-
-
-
15
15
10
10
15
15
15
15
15
22
18
20
8
17
15 - 18
20
8 - 10
17
18
15
28
15
20
15 - 18
10
18
5
-
12
20
12
5
5
20
18
18
15
15
-
-
18
10
15
15
17
15
17
17
15
15
-
-
-
-
-
10
17
15
17
20
20
20
-
-
-
-
22
-
-
-
-
-
-
20
-
20
20
-
20
-
20
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
20
20
-
-
20
22
-
-
-
-
-
-
20
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
20
20
25
23
25
-
-
-
30
30
-
30
30
25
30
-
30
25
30
30
25
30
-
35
-
-
-
25
25
25
25
-
35
-
25
25
-
-
25
27
-
-
-
25
25
25
25
-
-
-
-
-
-
30
30
25
30
30
30
30
-
-
-
30
30
-
30
30
30
40
-
40
30
35
35
30
40
30
35
-
-
-
30
30
30
30
-
35
-
30
30
-
-
30
32
-
-
-
30
30
30
30
-
-
-
-
-
-
35
35
40
30
45
30
R A
R S
-
R A
R E - R S
-
-
R A
R A
R A
-
R E - R S
R A - R S
-
-
R A - R S
-
-
-
R A - B V
R A
-
R A
R A
R A
R A
R A
R A - R S - B V
R E - R S
R A
-
R O M - R O S
-
-
-
-
R E - R S
R A
R O M - R O S
-
R A
R A
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
R E - R S
-
R A
-
R A
C arbon pellets
C arborundum up to 80m m
C asein
C ast Iron sw arf
C em ent, clinker
C em ent, dry
C em ent M ortar
C halk, broken
C halk, pulverised
C harcoal
C hestnuts
C hrom e O re
C lay, calcined
C lay, dry
C lay, dry
C lay, dry, lum ps
C lay, w et
C lay, w et
C oal
C oal, anthracite up to 3m m
C oal dust
C oal, pelletized
C ocoa beans
C ocoa pow der
C offee beans, green
C offee beans, raw
C offee beans, roasted
C oke breeze up to 7m m
C oke, loose
C oke, petroleum calcined
C oleseed
C om post
C oncrete, stone
C oncrete, w et (R eadym ix)
C oncrete w ith gravel
C oncrete w ith lim estone
C opper ore
C opper sulphate
C opra flakes
C ork, broken
C ork, fine
C ork, granulated
C ornm eal
C otton seed
C otton seed flock
C ryolite, dust
C ryolite, Lum ps
D icalcium Phosphate
D isodium Phosphate
D olom ite, broken
D olom ite, pieces
Earth, dry
Earth, excavated dry
Earth, w et
Earth, w et loam y
Q .3
R ecom -
(t/m
3
1.04 - 1.12
1.6
1.44 - 1.76
1.12 - 1.36
0.90 - 1.20
1.15
0.60 - 0.80
0.55 - 0.65
0.70 - 0.75
1.76 - 1.92
0.56 - 1.68
2.50
0.45 - 0.80
1.12 - 1.60
0.35
0.48 - 0.56
0.64
0.56 - 0.64
0.96 - 1.04
1.30 - 1.60
0.60
1.36 - 1.44
1.40 - 1.80
1.52 - 1.60
1.28 - 1.44
0.60 - 0.65
0.45
0.22
1.44 - 1.60
1.40 - 1.50
1.80 - 1.90
0.35
0.35
0.30
0.35
1.12
1.35
1.80
1.20
0.95 - 1.50
1.45
0.80
0.45
0.90
2.00 - 4.50
2.16 - 2.40
5.00
0.40
2.00
1.00
1.00
0.70 - 0.90
0.17 - 0.22
1.60
-
20
-
-
15
10
10
5
5
-
-
15
15
-
10
10
-
-
20
15
-
-
15
-
-
10
5
5
-
10
15
20
10
10
18
-
15
10
10
10
15
10
22
22
15
-
5
-
-
20
20
30
5
17
-
18
-
-
20
15
12
14
14
-
-
17
15
-
15
15
-
-
20
18 - 20
12
-
15
-
-
15
15
15
-
17
18
10 - 15
14
14
12
-
15
15
-
18
17
15 - 20
20
20
18
-
12
-
-
19
19
20
15
17
-
-
-
-
25
-
-
25
20
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
25
-
-
-
-
18
20
-
-
-
-
8
22
-
20
-
-
25
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Ebonite up to 13m m
Felspar, broken
Felspar, lum p size 40-80m m
Felspar, screened to 13m m
Fertilizer
Filter cake
Filter m ud
Fishm eal
Flaxseed
Flourcalcium 40-80m m
Flourcalcium , screened
Flourspar
Fly ash
Foundry w aste
Fruit
Fullers earth, dry
Fullers earth, oil filter, burnt
Fullers earth, oil filter raw
Fullers earth, oily
G lass, broken
G rain
G ranite, 40-50m m lum ps
G ranite ballast
G ranite, broken
G ranite, screened, up to 13m m
G raphite flock
G raphite, pulverized
G rass seed
G ravel
G ravel, dry
G ravel, w et
G reen fodder
G round nut kernels
G round nuts, w ith shells
G round nuts, w ithout shells
G uano, dry
G ypsum , broken
G ypsum , burnt
G ypsum m ortar
G ypsum , pulverized
G ypsum , sieved
H ousehold refuse
H usks, dry
H usks, w et
Iron O re, broken
Iron O re, crushed
Iron O re, pellets
Iron O xide, pigm ent
Iron turnings (Sw arf)
Kaolin, broken
Kaolin clay up to 80m m
Kaolin, pulverized
Kieselguhr
Kiln B rick
-
25
-
-
30
-
-
30
30
-
-
25
25
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
25
-
-
-
-
25
-
30
30
25
20
25
20
-
25
25
-
30
25
25
-
-
30
-
20
-
-
-
-
-
-
25 - 30
-
30
-
-
35
-
-
30
35
-
-
30
30
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
30
-
-
-
-
30
-
35
35
30
25
30
25
-
30
30
-
30
30
30
-
-
35
-
25
-
-
-
-
-
-
25 - 30
-
R S
-
-
-
-
-
M O R S-R O M
M O R S
-
-
R E - R S
-
-
-
R A
-
-
R A
-
R A
-
-
-
-
R A
R A
R A
-
R A
R A
-
R O M
R O M
-
-
-
R A
-
R A
R A
-
R A - R O S
R A - R O S
R S - R A S
-
R S - R A S
-
-
R A
R A
R A
-
R A - R S
Q .4
R ecom -
(t/m
3
Lactose (m ilk sugar)
Lead - A rsenate
Lead O re
Lead - O xide
Legum es
Lim e, hydrated
Lim e, lum ps
Lim e, pulverized
Lim e, slaked
Lim e up to 3m m
Lim estone, B roken
Lim estone, dust
Linseed
Linseed cake
M agnesite
M agnesite, fine
M agnesium chloride
M agnesium oxide
M agnesium sulphate
M agnetite
M aize
M aize, shelled
M alt, dry
M anganese dioxide
M anganese ore
M anganese sulphate
M anure
M arble, broken
M arble, crushed, up to 13m m
M arl, dry
M eal
M olybdenite, pow dered
M ortar, cem ent
M ortar, G ypsum
M ortar, Lim e
M oulding sand, core sand
M oulding sand, knock-out
M oulding sand, prepared
M ushroom s
N ickel O re
O ats
O il Sand
O re, C opper
O re, Iron
O re, Lead
O re, M anganese
O re, Zinc
O verburden
Peas, dried
Peat, dry
Peat, w et
Phosphate, broken
Phosphate, fertilizer
Phosphate, sand, cem ent
0.51
1.15
3.20 - 4.70
0.96 - 2.40
0.85
0.60
1.20 - 1.36
1.00 - 1.20
0.64
0.96
1.40 - 1.50
1.30 - 1.40
0.72
0.75 - 0.80
3.00
1.04 - 1.20
0.52
1.90
1.10
3.00
0.70 - 0.75
0.70
0.30 - 0.50
1.28
2.0 - 2.3
1.12
1.10
2.70
1.44 - 1.52
1.20 - 1.30
0.60 - 0.70
1.71
2.00
1.20
1.70
1.04
1.45 - 1.60
1.30 - 1.45
0.40
2.40
0.55
1.50
1.92 - 2.40
2.00 - 4.50
3.2 - 4.7
2.0 - 2.3
2.40
1.7
0.70 - 0.80
0.32 - 0.80
0.65 - 1.00
1.20
0.96
1.36
-
-
15
15
5 - 10
15
-
5
-
15
15
5
5
10
15
-
20
10
10
15
5
10
5
-
25
10
15
15
15
10
5
15
10
10
10
15
10
10
10
-
5
15
15
15
15
25
15
15
5
15
15
15
-
-
-
-
17
15
8 - 10
15
-
20
-
18
18
15
12 - 15
15
17
-
20
17
16
17
10 - 12
10
15
-
20
15
20
15
17
17
20
18
-
-
8
20
18
20
15
-
15
15
15
18
17
20
15
17
14
15
12
15
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
22
-
-
22
-
20
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
20
-
-
-
25
-
-
-
22
-
-
-
-
-
-
25
-
-
20
-
-
25
-
-
-
-
18
25
-
-
-
-
-
-
25
25
-
-
-
25
-
25
30
25
30
-
-
-
-
25
25
-
25
25
25
-
-
-
30
25
25
25
30
-
20
20
20
-
-
30
25
-
25
25
-
30
25
-
25
-
20
25
25
25
-
-
-
-
30
30
20
-
-
27
-
30
35
30
35
-
-
-
-
30
30
-
30
30
30
-
-
-
30
25
25
30
35
-
-
-
-
-
-
35
30
-
30
30
-
35
30
-
30
-
25
30
30
30
-
-
R A - R S
-
R A
R A
-
R A
-
-
-
R A
R A - R S
R A - R S
-
-
-
-
R A
R A
R A
-
-
B V - R O M - B VO
-
-
-
-
R O S
-
R A - R S
R A - R S
-
R A
R A
R A
-
-
-
-
-
-
R S
-
R E - R S
R S - R A S
R A
-
-
-
R A
-
-
-
-
-
Q .5
R ecom -
(t/m
3
Phosphate, pulverized
Phosphate rock, broken
Plaster
Portland cem ent
Portland cem ent, loose
Potash
Potash
Potash, broken
Potash salts, sylvite etc
Potassium (Saltpetre)
Potassium chloride pellets
Potassium sulphate
Potatoes
Pulp, dry
Pulp, w et
Pum ice stone
Pum ice stone sand
Pyrites, Iron lum p size 50-80m m
Pyrites, Iron Sulphide
Pyrites, pellets
Q uartz, broken
Q uartz, lum p size 40-80m m
Q uartz sand
R ape seed
R ice
R oadstone, B roken (Porphyry)
R ock salt
R ubber, dust
R ubber, pelletized
R ubber, reclaim
R un of m ine coal
R ye
Salt, coarse
Salt, com m on, dry
Salt, com m on, fine
Saltpetre
Saltpetre
Sand and gravel, dry
Sand and gravel, w et
Sand, dry
Sand, foundry, prepared
Sand pebble, dry
Sand, w et
Sandstone
Saw dust
Sew age Sludge
Shale
Shale, broken
Shale dust
Shale, lum p size 40-80m m
Sinter, blast furnace, dry
Slag, blast furnace
Slag, blast furnace, broken
Slag, porous, broken
Slate, broken
0.96
1.35 - 1.45
1.70
1.50
0.96 - 1.20
1.35
1.10 - 1.60
1.20 - 1.35
1.28
1.22
1.92 - 2.08
0.67 - 0.77
0.75
0.20 - 0.25
0.40
1.20
0.70
2.16 - 2.32
2.00 - 2.50
1.92 - 2.08
1.60 - 1.75
1.36 - 1.52
1.70 - 1.90
0.80
0.70 - 0.80
1.50 - 1.70
1.00 - 1.20
0.60 - 0.65
0.80 - 0.88
0.40 - 0.48
0.80 - 1.00
0.70 - 0.80
0.70 - 0.80
0.64 - 0.88
1.12 - 1.28
1.10
1.70
1.50 - 1.80
1.80 - 2.10
1.30 - 1.60
1.44 - 1.60
2.00
1.60 - 2.00
1.36 - 1.44
0.20 - 0.30
0.64 - 0.80
2.70
1.44 - 1.60
1.12 - 1.28
1.36 - 1.52
1.50
1.50
1.28 - 1.44
0.60
1.40 - 1.55
-
15
10
20
15
10
10
-
-
-
-
-
15
15
15
15
10
-
15
15
15
-
15
5
5
15
10
10
10
10
15
5
10
-
10
5
10
10
15
10
20
5
15
15
20
-
15
-
-
-
15
15
10
15
15
-
15
15
18
15
17
20
-
-
-
-
-
12
15
12
17
15
-
15
15
17
-
17
12
8
20
15
20
20
20
18
15
17
-
17
15
16
18
20
17
17
15
20
17
18
15
18
-
-
-
15
-
15
15
17
-
-
-
-
-
20
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
20
-
-
-
-
-
20
15
12
22
-
-
-
-
22
20
-
-
25
20
-
20
25
20
-
20
25
-
20
-
-
-
-
-
-
25
-
-
-
-
25
20
30
-
25
30
-
-
-
-
-
20
25
25
25
25
-
25
25
25
-
25
25
20
30
30
25
25
25
35
30
30
-
30
25
-
30
30
25
30
25
35
30
25
-
25
-
-
-
25
30
25
25
25
-
30
-
30
-
30
35
-
-
-
-
-
25
30
25
30
30
-
30
30
30
-
30
25
25
35
35
30
30
30
40
35
35
-
35
30
-
35
35
30
35
30
35
35
25
-
30
-
-
-
30
-
30
30
30
-
-
R A
R A
R A
R A - R S
-
-
-
-
-
-
R A
-
-
-
-
-
-
R A - R S
-
-
R A - R S
-
R A
-
-
-
R A
R A
-
R A
R A
-
R A
-
R A
R A
R A
R A
R A
R A
R A
R A - R S - R A S
R O M
R A - R O S
R A - R S - R A S
-
-
-
-
-
R A - R S - R A S
-
R A - R E
Q .6
R ecom -
(t/m
3
Soap beads or granules
Soap flakes
Soda
Soda ash, heavy
Soda ash, light
Sodium B icarbonate
Sodium nitrate
Soot
Soya beans
Steel trim m ings, shredded
Stone, broken, sm all
Stone, large, sized
Stone, sized
Sugar cane, raw
Sugar, granulated
Sugar, pow dered
Sugar, raw
Sugar-beet
Sugar-beet, sliced, dam p
Sugar-beet, sliced, dry
Sugar-beet, w et
Sulphate, ferrous
Sulphur, broken
Sulphur, pulverized
Table Salt
Tile, hard
Tile, soft
Titanium , w ashed
Tom atoes
W heat
W heat, flour
W ood chips
W ood chips, w et
W ood shavings
Zinc O re
Zinc O re, burnt
Zinc O re, crushed
Zinc O xide, heavy
Zinc O xide, light
Zinc Sulphate
0.24 - 0.40
0.15 - 0.35
0.90 - 1.20
0.88 - 1.04
0.32 - 0.56
0.65
1.12 - 1.28
0.40 - 0.75
0.80
1.60 - 2.40
1.50 - 1.80
1.40 - 1.60
1.55 - 1.70
0.88 - 1.04
0.60 - 0.80
0.80 - 0.96
0.90 - 1.50
0.70
0.40
0.20 - 0.25
0.88 - 1.04
0.80 - 1.20
1.30
0.90
0.80
2.00
1.60
0.96 - 1.12
0.90
0.75
0.55 - 0.65
0.30 - 0.40
0.60 - 0.85
0.16 - 0.48
2.40
1.60
2.56
0.48 - 0.56
0.16 - 0.24
3.70
10
10
-
-
-
-
-
5
15
-
15
15
10
10
5
0
15
18
15
-
-
-
15
5
10
-
-
15
10
10
5
-
10
5
15
-
15
15
-
15
12
18
17
-
-
-
-
15
18
-
15
15
15
19
15
12
20
18
18 - 20
18
-
-
17
19
20
-
-
17
10 - 12
14
20
15
20
12
15
-
17
17
-
17
18
22
-
-
-
-
-
20
-
-
-
-
-
22
20
16
20
-
-
-
-
-
20
25
25
-
-
-
-
20
22
-
-
18
-
-
-
-
-
-
25
25
20
-
-
-
-
25
-
-
25
20
22
25
25
20
25
-
25
25
-
-
30
30
30
-
-
-
20
30
30
20
20
20
25
-
25
20
-
25
-
30
25
-
-
-
-
30
-
-
30
25
27
-
-
25
-
30
30
30
-
-
35
35
35
-
-
-
30
35
35
-
-
25
30
-
30
25
-
30
R A
R A
R A
-
-
-
-
-
R O S
-
-
-
-
R A
R A
R A
-
R A
-
-
-
-
R A
R A
-
-
-
R A - R S - R A S
-
R O M
-
-
-
R A - R O M
-
-
R A - R S - R A S
R A
-
R A

Belt Conveyor Design-Dunlop

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Belt Conveyor Design-Dunlop

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Belt Conveyor Design-Dunlop

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CONVEYOR BELT TECHNIQUE

From the graph the follo-

Steep Inclining B elts: M ultiprof

is not to be confused w ith surface pressure!

B elt tension at rest

0.64 0.71 0.77 0.83 0.89 0 .93 1.00

w ould be fulfilled w ith = 0.3,

1.37 1.60 1.87 2.19 2.56 4.00 3.52 4.11

H ysteresis loop of a conveyor belt

1 Perm issible values

1 Perm issible values

You might also like